E-Class

Coupe and Cabriolet

E-Class Coupe and Cabriolet

Operator's Manual

É2075846181zËÍ
2075846181

Order no. 6515 3764 13 Part no. 207 584 61 81 Edition A 2014
Symbols i Practical tips or further information that Publication details
Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you. Internet
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol indicates an
Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed. Further information about Mercedes-Benz
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X Several of these symbols in vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
succession indicate an instruction on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
with several steps. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are (Y page) This symbol tells you where you http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
can find more information about a only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
topic.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
Johnson Controls. Editorial office
an instruction that is continued on
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
the next page.
trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
multifunction display/COMAND or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
Harman International Industries. display. without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005
Corporation. The FreeType Project
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights
XM Radio Inc. reserved.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.

H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.

As at 22.11.2012
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

2075846181 É2075846181zËÍ
 Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 115

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 133

Climate control ................................. 147

Driving and parking .......................... 163

On-board computer and displays .... 231

Stowage and features ...................... 287

Maintenance and care ...................... 311

Breakdown assistance ..................... 327

Wheels and tires ............................... 343

Technical data ................................... 381

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Additives (engine oil) ........................ 387

Air bags
12 V socket Display message ............................ 256
see Sockets Front air bag (driver, front
360° camera passenger) ....................................... 46
Cleaning ......................................... 324 Head bag ......................................... 48
Function/notes ............................. 215 Important safety notes .................... 44
4ETS Knee bag .......................................... 47
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Traction System) indicator lamp .................................. 50
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Pelvis air bag ................................... 49
drive) .................................................. 203 Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Side impact air bag .......................... 47
A Window curtain air bag .................... 49
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) AIRCAP
Display message ............................ 249 Cleaning instructions ..................... 321
Function/notes ................................ 69 Extending/retracting ..................... 107
Important safety notes .................... 69 Important safety notes .................. 107
Warning lamp ................................. 278 Installing/removing the wind
Activating/deactivating cooling screen ............................................ 108
with air dehumidification ................. 153 Air-conditioning system
Active Blind Spot Assist see Climate control
Activating/deactivating (on- AIRSCARF
board computer) ............................ 242 Switching on/off ........................... 124
Display message ............................ 265 AIRSCARF vents
Function/information .................... 225 Setting the blower output .............. 160
Active Driving Assistance package . 225 Air vents
Active Lane Keeping Assist Glove box ....................................... 160
Activating/deactivating (on- Important safety notes .................. 159
board computer) ............................ 242 Rear ............................................... 160
Display message ............................ 264 Setting ........................................... 159
Function/information .................... 228 Setting the blower output of the
Active light function ......................... 139 AIRSCARF vents ............................. 160
Active Parking Assist Setting the center air vents ........... 159
Detecting parking spaces .............. 208 Setting the side air vents ............... 159
Display message ............................ 265 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 124
Exiting a parking space .................. 210 Alarm system
Function/notes ............................. 207 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Important safety notes .................. 207 Ambient lighting
Parking .......................................... 209 Setting the brightness (on-board
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76 computer) ...................................... 244
Adaptive Brake Assist Setting the color (on-board
Function/notes ................................ 73 computer) ...................................... 244
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Anti-lock braking system
Display message ............................ 260 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Function/notes ............................. 139 Anti-theft alarm system
Switching on/off ........................... 140 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 295
 Index 5

Assistance display (on-board Kickdown ....................................... 175

computer) .......................................... 240 Manual drive program .................... 176
Assistance menu (on-board Manual drive program (vehicles
computer) .......................................... 240 with Sports package AMG) ............ 177
ASSYST PLUS Overview ........................................ 172
Displaying a service message ........ 317 Problem (malfunction) ................... 179
Hiding a service message .............. 316 Program selector button ................ 175
Notes ............................................. 316 Pulling away ................................... 167
Resetting the service interval Starting the engine ........................ 167
display ........................................... 317 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 176
Service message ............................ 316 Transmission position display
Special service requirements ......... 317 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 172
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Transmission positions .................. 174
Activating/deactivating ................... 78 Automatic transmission
Function ........................................... 78 emergency mode ............................... 179
Switching off the alarm .................... 78
ATTENTION ASSIST B
Activating/deactivating ................. 242
Bag hook ............................................ 292
Display message ............................ 263
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 69
Function/notes ............................. 220
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Audio system
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
see separate operating instructions
Function/notes ................................ 70
Authorized Centers
BAS PLUS Q (Brake Assist System
see Qualified specialist workshop
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Important safety notes .................... 70
see Qualified specialist workshop
Battery (SmartKey)
Authorized workshops
Checking .......................................... 85
see Qualified specialist workshop
Important safety notes .................... 85
AUTO lights
Replacing ......................................... 85
Display message ............................ 260
Battery (vehicle)
see Lights
Charging ........................................ 332
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Display message ............................ 262
stop function) .................................... 169
Important safety notes .................. 330
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Jump starting ................................. 334
start/stop function) .......................... 169
Belt force limiter
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 135
Activation ......................................... 61
Automatic transmission
Function ........................................... 61
Automatic drive program ............... 176
Blind Spot Assist
Changing gear ............................... 175
Activating/deactivating ................. 242
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 172
Display message ............................ 265
Display message ............................ 271
Notes/function .............................. 221
Drive program display .................... 172
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Driving tips .................................... 175
Brake Assist
Emergency running mode .............. 179
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Engaging drive position .................. 174
Brake fluid
Engaging neutral ............................ 173
Display message ............................ 252
Engaging reverse gear ................... 173
Notes ............................................. 387
Engaging the park position ............ 172
6 Index

Brake lamps Sensors ......................................... 323

Display message ............................ 258 Soft top .......................................... 320
Brakes Steering wheel ............................... 325
ABS .................................................. 69 Trim pieces .................................... 325
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 73 Washing by hand ........................... 319
BAS .................................................. 69 Wheels ........................................... 322
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 70 Wind deflector ............................... 321
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 387 Windows ........................................ 322
Display message ............................ 249 Wind screen ................................... 321
Driving tips .................................... 186 Wiper blades .................................. 322
HOLD function ............................... 201 Wooden trim .................................. 325
Important safety notes .................. 186 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 291
Maintenance .................................. 187 Car keys
Parking brake ................................ 183 see SmartKey
Warning lamp ................................. 277 Car wash (care) ................................. 318
Breakdown CD player/CD changer (on-board
see Flat tire computer) .......................................... 238
Bulbs Center console
see Replacing bulbs Lower section ............................ 36, 37
Upper section .................................. 34
C Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
California
computer) ...................................... 245
Important notice for retail
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 82
customers and lessees .................... 23
Changing bulbs
Calling up a malfunction
High-beam headlamps ................... 143
see Display messages
Child-proof locks
Car
Important safety notes .................... 67
see Vehicle
Children
Care
In the vehicle ................................... 62
360° camera ................................. 324
Restraint systems ............................ 62
AIRCAP .......................................... 321
Special seat belt retractor ............... 65
Carpets .......................................... 326
Child seat
Car wash ........................................ 318
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Display ........................................... 324
anchors ............................................ 66
Exhaust pipe .................................. 324
Top Tether ....................................... 66
Exterior lights ................................ 323
Cigarette lighter ................................ 296
Gear or selector lever .................... 325
Cleaning
Interior ........................................... 324
Mirror turn signal ........................... 323
Matte finish ................................... 320
Climate control
Notes ............................................. 317
Automatic climate control (3-zone) 151
Paint .............................................. 319
Controlling automatically ............... 154
Plastic trim .................................... 324
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 153
Power washer ................................ 319
Defrosting the windows ................. 157
Rear view camera .......................... 323
Defrosting the windshield .............. 156
Roof lining ...................................... 326
Dual-zone automatic climate
Seat belt ........................................ 326
control ........................................... 149
Seat cover ..................................... 325
Important safety notes .................. 148
 Index 7

Indicator lamp ................................ 154 Coolant (engine)

Information about using dual-zone Checking the level ......................... 315
automatic climate control .............. 150 Display message ............................ 260
Information on using dual-zone Filling capacity ............................... 389
automatic climate control .............. 152 Important safety notes .................. 388
Maximum cooling .......................... 157 Temperature gauge ........................ 232
Overview of systems ...................... 148 Warning lamp ................................. 282
Problems with cooling with air Cooling
dehumidification ............................ 154 see Climate control
Problem with the rear window Copyright ............................................. 27
defroster ........................................ 158 Cornering light function
Rear control panel ......................... 151 Display message ............................ 257
Refrigerant ..................................... 389 Function/notes ............................. 139
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 390 Crash-responsive emergency
Setting the air distribution ............. 155 lighting ............................................... 142
Setting the airflow ......................... 156 Cruise control
Setting the air vents ...................... 159 Activation conditions ..................... 190
Setting the climate mode ............... 154 Cruise control lever ....................... 189
Setting the temperature ................ 155 Deactivating ................................... 191
Setting the temperature with 3- Display message ............................ 268
zone automatic climate control ..... 155 Driving system ............................... 189
Setting the temperature with dual- Function/notes ............................. 189
zone automatic climate control ..... 155 Important safety notes .................. 189
Switching air-recirculation mode Setting a speed .............................. 190
on/off ............................................ 158 Storing and maintaining current
Switching on/off ........................... 152 speed ............................................. 190
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 158 Cup holder
Switching the rear window Center console .............................. 294
defroster on/off ............................ 157 Important safety notes .................. 293
Switching the ZONE function on/ Rear compartment ......................... 294
off .................................................. 156 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 26
Cockpit Customer Relations Department ....... 26
Overview .......................................... 30
see Instrument cluster D
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating the Dashboard
distance warning function .............. 241 see Instrument cluster
Display message ............................ 253 Dashboard lighting
Operation/notes .............................. 71 see Instrument cluster lighting
COMAND Data
see separate operating instructions see Technical data
COMAND display Daytime running lamps
Cleaning ......................................... 324 Display message ............................ 259
Combination switch .......................... 137 Function/notes ............................. 135
Consumption statistics (on-board Switching on/off (on-board
computer) .......................................... 235 computer) ...................................... 244
Convenience closing feature .............. 97 Dealerships
Convenience opening feature ............ 96 see Qualified specialist workshop
8 Index

Declarations of conformity ................. 25 Display message ............................ 272

Delayed switch-off Emergency locking ........................... 90
Exterior lighting (on-board Emergency unlocking ....................... 90
computer) ...................................... 245 Important safety notes .................... 88
Interior lighting .............................. 245 Opening (from inside) ...................... 88
Diagnostics connection ...................... 25 Draft stop ........................................... 106
Digital speedometer ......................... 236 Drinking and driving ......................... 184
DIRECT SELECT lever Drinks holder
see Automatic transmission see Cup holder
Display messages Drive program
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 316 Automatic ...................................... 176
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 248 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 172
Driving systems ............................. 263 Manual ........................................... 176
Engine ............................................ 260 Manual (vehicles with Sports
General notes ................................ 248 package AMG) ............................... 177
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 248 Driver's door
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 274 see Doors
Lights ............................................. 257 Driving abroad
Safety systems .............................. 249 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 317
SmartKey ....................................... 274 Symmetrical low beam .................. 134
Tires ............................................... 269 Driving on flooded roads .................. 188
Vehicle ........................................... 271 Driving safety system
Distance recorder ............................. 235 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 70
see Odometer Driving safety systems
see Trip odometer ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 69
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 284 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76
Distance warning function Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 73
Activating/deactivating ................. 241 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 69
Function/notes ................................ 71 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 71
DISTRONIC PLUS Distance warning function ............... 71
Activating ....................................... 193 Electronic brake force distribution ... 75
Activation conditions ..................... 193 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 74
Deactivating ................................... 198 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Display message ............................ 266 System) ........................................... 74
Displays in the multifunction Important safety information ........... 68
display ........................................... 197 Overview .......................................... 68
Function/notes ............................. 191 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 76
Important safety notes .................. 192 STEER CONTROL ............................. 78
Setting the specified minimum Driving systems
distance ......................................... 196 360°camera .................................. 215
Warning lamp ................................. 284 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 225
Doors Active Driving Assistance package 225
Automatic locking (on-board Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 228
computer) ...................................... 245 Active Parking Assist ..................... 207
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 89 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 220
Central locking/unlocking Blind Spot Assist ............................ 221
(SmartKey) ....................................... 82 Cruise control ................................ 189
Control panel ................................... 39
 Index 9

Display message ............................ 263 EBD (electronic brake force

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191 distribution)
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Display message ............................ 251
Assist ............................................. 200 Function/notes ................................ 75
Dynamic handling package with ECO display
sports mode .................................. 203 Function/notes ............................. 185
HOLD function ............................... 201 On-board computer ....................... 236
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 223 ECO start/stop function
Lane Tracking package .................. 221 Automatic engine start .................. 169
PARKTRONIC ................................. 204 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 169
Rear view camera .......................... 212 Deactivating/activating ................. 170
Driving tips General information ....................... 168
Automatic transmission ................. 175 Important safety notes .................. 168
Brakes ........................................... 186 Introduction ................................... 168
Break-in period .............................. 164 Electronic Stability Program
Downhill gradient ........................... 186 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Drinking and driving ....................... 184 Emergency closing
Driving abroad ............................... 134 Soft top .......................................... 101
Driving in winter ............................. 188 Emergency release
Driving on flooded roads ................ 188 Driver's door .................................... 90
Driving on wet roads ...................... 188 Trunk ............................................... 93
Exhaust check ............................... 185 Vehicle ............................................. 90
Fuel ................................................ 184 Emergency spare wheel
General .......................................... 184 Important safety notes .................. 377
Hydroplaning ................................. 188 Points to remember ....................... 377
Icy road surfaces ........................... 188 Storage location ............................ 378
Limited braking efficiency on Technical data ............................... 379
salted roads ................................... 187 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Snow chains .................................. 347 Function ........................................... 61
Symmetrical low beam .................. 134 Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Wet road surface ........................... 187 Emissions control
DVD audio Service and warranty information .... 22
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 238 Engine
DVD video Check Engine warning lamp ........... 282
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 239 Display message ............................ 260
Dynamic handling package with ECO start/stop function ................ 168
sports mode ....................................... 203 Engine number ............................... 383
Irregular running ............................ 171
E Jump-starting ................................. 334
EASY-ENTRY feature Starting problems .......................... 171
Activating/deactivating ................. 246 Starting the engine with the
Function/notes ............................. 126 SmartKey ....................................... 167
EASY-EXIT feature Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 167
Crash-responsive ........................... 127 Switching off .................................. 183
Function/notes ............................. 126 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 338
Switching on/off ........................... 246 Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 171
10 Index

Engine oil Floormats ........................................... 308

Adding ........................................... 314 Fuel
Additives ........................................ 387 Additives ........................................ 385
Checking the oil level ..................... 313 Consumption statistics .................. 235
Checking the oil level using the Displaying the current
dipstick .......................................... 313 consumption .................................. 236
Display message ............................ 262 Displaying the range ...................... 236
Filling capacity ............................... 387 Driving tips .................................... 184
Notes about oil grades ................... 386 Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 386
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 313 Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Viscosity ........................................ 387 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 385
ESP® (Electronic Stability Important safety notes .................. 384
Program) Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 385
Deactivating/activating ................. 241 Problem (malfunction) ................... 182
Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 75 Refueling ........................................ 179
Display message ............................ 249 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 384
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 74 Fuel filler flap
Function/notes ................................ 74 Opening/closing ............................ 180
General notes .................................. 74 Fuel level
Important safety information ........... 74 Calling up the range (on-board
Warning lamp ................................. 279 computer) ...................................... 236
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Fuel tank
System) ................................................ 74 Capacity ........................................ 384
Exhaust check ................................... 185 Problem (malfunction) ................... 182
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 324 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
Exterior lighting kit) ...................................................... 328
Setting options .............................. 134 Fuses
see Lights Allocation chart ............................. 339
Exterior mirrors Before changing ............................. 339
Adjusting ....................................... 127 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 339
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 129 Fuse box in the engine
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 128 compartment ................................. 340
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 128 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 340
Folding in when locking (on-board Important safety notes .................. 339
computer) ...................................... 246
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 129 G
Setting ........................................... 128
Garage door opener
Storing settings (memory function) 130
Clearing the memory ..................... 308
Storing the parking position .......... 129
Important safety notes .................. 305
Opening/closing the garage door .. 308
F Programming (button in the rear-
Filler cap view mirror) ................................... 306
see Fuel filler flap Genuine parts ...................................... 21
First-aid kit ......................................... 328 Glove box ........................................... 289
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 329
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 328
 Index 11

H Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 31
Handbrake Settings ......................................... 243
see Parking brake Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 138 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 244
Head bags Interior lighting ................................. 141
Display message ............................ 254 Automatic control .......................... 141
Operation ......................................... 48 Delayed switch-off (on-board
Headlamps computer) ...................................... 245
Fogging up ..................................... 141 Emergency lighting ........................ 142
see Automatic headlamp mode Manual control ............................... 142
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 124 Overview ........................................ 141
Head restraint Reading lamp ................................. 141
Lowering manually (rear) ............... 119 Setting the brightness of the
Head restraints ambient lighting (on-board
Adjusting ....................................... 118 computer) ...................................... 244
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 119 Setting the brightness of the
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 119 display/switch (on-board
see NECK-PRO head restraints computer) ...................................... 244
Heating Setting the color of the ambient
see Climate control lighting (on-board computer) ......... 244
High-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 143 J
Display message ............................ 258
Switching on/off ........................... 138 Jack
Hill start assist .................................. 168 Storage location ............................ 328
HOLD function Using ............................................. 369
Activating ....................................... 202 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 334
Deactivating ................................... 202
Display message ............................ 263 K
Function/notes ............................. 201 KEYLESS-GO
Hood Convenience closing feature ............ 97
Closing ........................................... 313 Display message ............................ 274
Display message ............................ 272 Locking ............................................ 83
Important safety notes .................. 312 Start/Stop button .......................... 165
Opening ......................................... 312 Starting the engine ........................ 167
Hydroplaning ..................................... 188 Unlocking ......................................... 83
Key positions
I KEYLESS-GO .................................. 165
Ignition lock SmartKey ....................................... 165
see Key positions Kickdown
Immobilizer .......................................... 78 Driving tips .................................... 175
Indicator lamps Manual drive program .................... 178
see Warning and indicator lamps Knee bag .............................................. 47
12 Index

L Switching the surround lighting

on/off (on-board computer) .......... 245
Lamps Turn signals ................................... 137
see Warning and indicator lamps see Interior lighting
Lane Keeping Assist see Replacing bulbs
Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Light sensor (display message) ....... 260
Display message ............................ 264 Loading guidelines ............................ 288
Function/information .................... 223 Locking
Lane Tracking package ..................... 221 see Central locking
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Locking (doors)
anchors ................................................ 66 Automatic ........................................ 89
License plate lamp (display Emergency locking ........................... 90
message) ............................................ 258 From inside (central locking
Light function, active button) ............................................. 89
Display message ............................ 259 Locking centrally
Lighting see Central locking
Light switch ................................... 134 Locking verification signal (on-
Lights board computer) ............................... 246
Activating/deactivating the Low-beam headlamps
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 245 Display message ............................ 257
Active light function ....................... 139 Setting for driving abroad
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 135 (symmetrical) ................................. 134
Cornering light function ................. 139 Switching on/off ........................... 136
Driving abroad ............................... 134 Luggage cover
Hazard warning lamps ................... 138 see Trunk partition
High beam flasher .......................... 138 Lumbar support
High-beam headlamps ................... 138 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Low-beam headlamps .................... 136 support .......................................... 121
Parking lamps ................................ 136
Rear fog lamp ................................ 136
M
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board M+S tires ............................................ 346
computer) ...................................... 244 Malfunction message
Setting the brightness of the see Display messages
display/switch (on-board Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 320
computer) ...................................... 244 mbrace
Setting the color of the ambient Call priority .................................... 301
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 244 Display message ............................ 252
Standing lamps .............................. 137 Downloading destinations
Switching the daytime running (COMAND) ..................................... 301
lamps on/off (on-board computer) 244 Downloading routes ....................... 304
Switching the exterior lighting Emergency call .............................. 298
delayed switch-off on/off (on- General notes ................................ 297
board computer) ............................ 245 Geo fencing ................................... 305
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 303
MB info call button ........................ 300
Remote vehicle locking .................. 303
Roadside Assistance button .......... 299
 Index 13

Search & Send ............................... 302 N

Self-test ......................................... 297
Speed alert .................................... 305 Navigation
System .......................................... 297 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 237
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 305 Neck-level heating
Vehicle remote malfunction see AIRSCARF
diagnosis ....................................... 303 NECK-PRO head restraints
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 302 Operation ......................................... 55
Mechanical key Resetting after being triggered ........ 56
Function/notes ................................ 84 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 164
Locking vehicle ................................ 90
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90 O
Memory card (audio) ......................... 238 Occupant Classification System
Memory function ............................... 130 (OCS)
Message memory (on-board Faults ............................................... 54
computer) .......................................... 248 Operation ......................................... 50
Messages System self-test ............................... 53
see Display messages Occupant safety
Mirrors Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
see Exterior mirrors Important safety notes .................... 42
see Rear-view mirror OCS
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Faults ............................................... 54
Mobile phone Operation ......................................... 50
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 239 System self-test ............................... 53
Modifying the programming Odometer ........................................... 235
(SmartKey) ........................................... 83 Oil
MOExtended tires .............................. 329 see Engine oil
Mounting wheels On-board computer
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 371 Assistance menu ........................... 240
Mounting a new wheel ................... 371 Audio menu ................................... 238
Raising the vehicle ......................... 369 Convenience submenu .................. 246
Removing a wheel .......................... 370 Displaying a service message ........ 317
Securing the vehicle against Display messages .......................... 248
rolling away ................................... 368 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 197
MP3 Factory settings submenu ............. 247
Operation ....................................... 238 Important safety notes .................. 232
see separate operating instructions Instrument cluster submenu .......... 243
Multicontour seat Lighting submenu .......................... 244
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 121 Menu overview .............................. 235
Multifunction display Message memory .......................... 248
Function/notes ............................. 234 Navigation menu ............................ 237
Permanent display ......................... 243 Operation ....................................... 233
Multifunction steering wheel Service menu ................................. 243
Operating the on-board computer . 233 Settings menu ............................... 243
Overview .......................................... 33 Standard display ............................ 235
Telephone menu ............................ 239
Trip menu ...................................... 235
14 Index

Vehicle submenu ........................... 245 Function/notes ............................. 204

Video DVD operation ..................... 239 Important safety notes .................. 204
Operating safety Problem (malfunction) ................... 207
Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Range of the sensors ..................... 204
Important safety notes .................... 24 Warning display ............................. 205
Operating system PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
see On-board computer Problem (malfunction) ..................... 54
Operator's Manual Problems (malfunction) .................. 256
Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Outside temperature display ........... 233 lamp ...................................................... 50
Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 324
Override feature Power washers .................................. 319
Rear side windows ........................... 68 Power windows
see Side windows
P PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Paint code number ............................ 382
Display message ............................ 252
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 319
Operation ......................................... 56
Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Panorama roof with power tilt/ PRE-SAFE® Brake
sliding panel Activating/deactivating ................. 241
Display message ............................ 253
Opening/closing ............................ 111
Function/notes ................................ 76
Opening/closing the roller
Important safety notes .................... 76
sunblind ......................................... 112
Warning lamp ................................. 284
Problem (malfunction) ................... 114
Program selector button .................. 175
Resetting ....................................... 113
Panorama sliding sunroof Protection of the environment
Important safety notes .................. 110 General notes .................................. 21
Parking ............................................... 182 Pulling away
Important safety notes .................. 182 Automatic transmission ................. 167
Parking brake ................................ 183
Position of exterior mirror, front- Q
passenger side ............................... 129 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25
Rear view camera .......................... 212
see PARKTRONIC R
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 207 Radio
see Exterior mirrors Selecting a station ......................... 238
see PARKTRONIC see separate operating instructions
Parking brake Radio-wave reception/
Display message ............................ 251 transmission in the vehicle
Notes/function .............................. 183 Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Warning lamp ................................. 277 Reading lamp ..................................... 141
Parking lamps Rear compartment
Switching on/off ........................... 136 Setting the air vents ...................... 160
PARKTRONIC Setting the temperature ................ 155
Deactivating/activating ................. 206
Driving system ............................... 204
 Index 15

Rear fog lamp Reversing lamps (display message) 259

Display message ............................ 258 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23
Switching on/off ........................... 136 Roll bar
Rear seats Display message ............................ 253
Display message ............................ 272 Operation ......................................... 55
Rear view camera Roller sunblind
Cleaning instructions ..................... 323 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Function/notes ............................. 212 sliding panel .................................. 112
Switching on/off ........................... 212 Rear window .................................. 295
Rear-view mirror Roof
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 127 Overview .......................................... 99
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 129 see Soft top
Rear window blind ............................ 295 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Rear window defroster guidelines) ......................................... 326
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 390
Switching on/off ........................... 157
Refrigerant (air-conditioning S
system)
Safety
Important safety notes .................. 389
Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
Refueling
Child restraint systems .................... 62
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Occupant Classification System
Important safety notes .................. 179
(OCS) ............................................... 50
Refueling process .......................... 180
Safety system
see Fuel
see Driving safety systems
Remote control
Seat belts
Garage door opener ....................... 305
Adjusting the driver's and front-
Programming (garage door opener) 306
passenger seat belt ......................... 60
Replacing bulbs
Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 62
Important safety notes .................. 142
Belt force limiters ............................ 61
Overview of bulb types .................. 143
Cleaning ......................................... 326
Reporting safety defects .................... 26
Correct usage .................................. 58
Reserve (fuel tank)
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 61
see Fuel
Fastening ......................................... 59
Reserve fuel
Important safety guidelines ............. 57
Display message ............................ 262
Releasing ......................................... 60
Warning lamp ................................. 282
Safety guidelines ............................. 43
see Fuel
Switching belt adjustment on/off
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 158
(on-board computer) ...................... 246
Restraint system
Warning lamp ................................. 276
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Warning lamp (function) ................... 61
System)
Seats
Reversing feature
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 118
Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 111
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Roller sunblinds ............................. 112
support .......................................... 121
Side windows ................................... 94
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 118
Sliding sunroof ............................... 111
Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 121
Trunk lid ........................................... 91
Cleaning the cover ......................... 325
16 Index

Correct driver's seat position ........ 116 SmartKey

Folding the backrests forward/ Changing the battery ....................... 85
back ............................................... 120 Changing the programming ............. 83
Important safety notes .................. 117 Checking the battery ....................... 85
Overview ........................................ 117 Convenience closing feature ............ 97
Seat backrest display message ..... 272 Convenience opening feature .......... 96
Seat heating problem .................... 123 Display message ............................ 274
Seat ventilation problem ................ 124 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 82
Storing settings (memory function) 130 Important safety notes .................... 82
Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 124 Loss ................................................. 87
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 122 Mechanical key ................................ 84
Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 123 Opening/closing soft top ............... 101
Selector lever Overview .......................................... 82
Cleaning ......................................... 325 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 165
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 323 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87
Service menu (on-board computer) . 243 Starting the engine ........................ 167
Service products Snow chains ...................................... 347
Brake fluid ..................................... 387 Sockets
Coolant (engine) ............................ 388 General notes ................................ 296
Engine oil ....................................... 386 Rear compartment ......................... 297
Fuel ................................................ 384 Soft top
Important safety notes .................. 384 AIRCAP .......................................... 107
Refrigerant (air-conditioning Cleaning ......................................... 320
system) .......................................... 389 Closing manually in an emergency . 101
Washer fluid ................................... 389 Display message ............................ 273
Service work Important safety notes .................... 99
see ASSYST PLUS Installing/removing the AIRCAP
Settings wind screen ................................... 108
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 247 Opening/closing (SmartKey) ......... 101
On-board computer ....................... 243 Opening/closing (with soft-top
Setting the air distribution ............... 155 switch) ........................................... 100
Setting the airflow ............................ 156 Problem (malfunction) ................... 110
Side impact air bag ............................. 47 Relocking ....................................... 105
Side marker lamp (display wind screen ................................... 106
message) ............................................ 259 Soft-top switch .................................. 100
Side windows Spare wheel
Cleaning ......................................... 322 Storage location ............................ 378
Convenience closing feature ............ 97 see Emergency spare wheel
Convenience opening feature .......... 96 Specialist workshop ............................ 25
Important safety information ........... 94 Special seat belt retractor .................. 65
Opening/closing .............................. 94 Speed, controlling
Opening/closing all (Cabriolet) ........ 95 see Cruise control
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 Speedometer
Resetting ......................................... 98 Digital ............................................ 236
Sliding sunroof In the Instrument cluster ................. 31
see Panorama roof with power Segments ...................................... 233
tilt/sliding panel Selecting the unit of measurement 243
see Instrument cluster
 Index 17

SRS Sun visor ............................................ 294

see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Surround lighting (on-board
System) computer) .......................................... 245
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Switching air-recirculation mode
System) on/off ................................................. 158
Display message ............................ 253 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 78
Introduction ..................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 281 T
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43
Standing lamps Tachometer ........................................ 232
Display message ............................ 259 Tail lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 137 Display message ............................ 258
Start/stop function Tank content
see ECO start/stop function Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Starting (engine) ................................ 166 Technical data
STEER CONTROL .................................. 78 Capacities ...................................... 384
Steering (display message) .............. 273 Emergency spare wheel ................. 379
Information .................................... 382
Steering Assist (DISTRONIC PLUS)
Tires/wheels ................................. 372
Activating/deactivating ................. 242
Vehicle data ................................... 390
Display message ............................ 268
TELEAID
Steering wheel
Call priority .................................... 301
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 125
Downloading destinations
Button overview ............................... 33
(COMAND) ..................................... 301
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 233
Downloading routes ....................... 304
Cleaning ......................................... 325
Emergency call .............................. 298
Important safety notes .................. 124
Geo fencing ................................... 305
Paddle shifters ............................... 176
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 303
Steering wheel heating .................. 125
MB info call button ........................ 300
Storing settings (memory function) 130
Remote vehicle locking .................. 303
Steering wheel heating
Roadside Assistance button .......... 299
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126
Search & Send ............................... 302
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Self-test ......................................... 297
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 176
Speed alert .................................... 305
Stowage areas ................................... 288
System .......................................... 297
Stowage compartments
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 305
Armrest (under) ............................. 289
Vehicle remote malfunction
Center console .............................. 289
diagnosis ....................................... 303
Cup holders ................................... 293
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 302
Glove box ....................................... 289
Tele Aid
Important safety information ......... 288
General notes ................................ 297
Stowage net ................................... 290
Telephone
Under driver's seat/front-
Accepting a call ............................. 239
passenger seat .............................. 290
Display message ............................ 273
Stowage net ....................................... 290
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 239
Stowage well beneath the trunk
Number from the phone book ........ 239
floor .................................................... 292
Redialing ........................................ 240
Summer tires ..................................... 346
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 239
18 Index

Temperature GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Coolant .......................................... 232 (definition) ..................................... 365
Outside temperature ...................... 233 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Setting (climate control) ................ 155 (definition) ..................................... 365
Theft deterrent systems GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Rating) (definition) ......................... 365
Immobilizer ...................................... 78 Important safety notes .................. 344
Through-loading ................................ 290 Increased vehicle weight due to
Through-loading feature ................... 290 optional equipment (definition) ...... 365
Tire pressure Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 365
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 352 Labeling (overview) ........................ 361
Checking manually ........................ 351 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 366
Display message ............................ 269 Load index ..................................... 363
Important safety notes .................. 352 Load index (definition) ................... 365
Maximum ....................................... 350 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Notes ............................................. 349 (definition) ..................................... 365
Recommended ............................... 348 Maximum load on a tire (definition) 366
Tire pressure loss warning Maximum permissible tire
system pressure (definition) ....................... 366
General notes ................................ 351 Maximum tire load ......................... 363
Important safety notes .................. 351 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 366
Restarting ...................................... 352 MOExtended tires .......................... 346
Tire pressure monitoring system Optional equipment weight
Checking the tire pressure (definition) ..................................... 366
electronically ................................. 354 PSI (pounds per square inch)
Function/notes ............................. 352 (definition) ..................................... 366
General notes ................................ 352 Replacing ....................................... 367
Important safety notes .................. 353 Service life ..................................... 346
Restarting ...................................... 355 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 366
Warning lamp ................................. 285 Speed rating (definition) ................ 365
Warning message .......................... 354 Storing ........................................... 367
Tires Structure and characteristics
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 366 (definition) ..................................... 364
Average weight of the vehicle Temperature .................................. 360
occupants (definition) .................... 365 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Bar (definition) ............................... 364 (definition) ..................................... 366
Changing a wheel .......................... 367 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 366
Characteristics .............................. 364 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 366
Checking ........................................ 345 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 365
Definition of terms ......................... 364 Tire size (data) ............................... 372
Direction of rotation ...................... 367 Tire size designation, load-bearing
Display message ............................ 269 capacity, speed rating .................... 361
Distribution of the vehicle Tire tread ....................................... 345
occupants (definition) .................... 367 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 366
DOT, Tire Identification Number Total load limit (definition) ............. 367
(TIN) ............................................... 364 Traction ......................................... 360
DOT (Department of Traction (definition) ....................... 366
Transportation) (definition) ............ 365 Tread wear ..................................... 360
 Index 19

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Trunk partition

Standards ...................................... 359 Display message ............................ 273
Uniform Tire Quality Grading General notes ................................ 106
Standards (definition) .................... 365 Opening/closing ............................ 106
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 366 Turn signals
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 366 Display message ............................ 257
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 365 Switching on/off ........................... 137
see Flat tire Type identification plate
Top Tether ............................................ 66 see Vehicle identification plate
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 336 U
Installing the towing eye ................ 337
Unlocking
Removing the towing eye ............... 337
With the rear axle raised ................ 337 Emergency unlocking ....................... 90
Towing away From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 89
With both axles on the ground ....... 338
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 338 V
Important safety notes .................. 336 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 294
Transfer case ..................................... 179 Vehicle
Transmission Correct use ...................................... 26
see Automatic transmission Data acquisition ............................... 27
Transmission position display ......... 172 Display message ............................ 271
Transmission position display Equipment ....................................... 22
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 172 Individual settings .......................... 243
Transporting the vehicle .................. 338 Limited Warranty ............................. 26
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 325 Loading .......................................... 355
Trip computer (on-board computer) 235 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90
Trip odometer Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 82
Calling up ....................................... 235 Lowering ........................................ 371
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 236 Maintenance .................................... 23
Trunk Parking for a long period ................ 184
Emergency release .......................... 93 Pulling away ................................... 167
Important safety notes .................... 91 Raising ........................................... 369
Locking separately ........................... 93 Reporting problems ......................... 26
Opening/closing (manually from Securing from rolling away ............ 368
outside) ............................................ 91 Towing away .................................. 336
Opening (automatically from Transporting .................................. 338
inside) .............................................. 92 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90
Opening (automatically from Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 82
outside) ............................................ 92 Vehicle data ................................... 390
Trunk lid Vehicle data ....................................... 390
Display message ............................ 272 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 390
Opening/closing .............................. 91 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90
Opening dimensions ...................... 390 Vehicle identification number
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 390 see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 382
20 Index

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 328 Wind screen (cleaning instructions) 321
Video Windshield
Operating the DVD ......................... 239 Defrosting ...................................... 156
VIN ...................................................... 382 Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
W Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 315
Warning and indicator lamps
Notes ............................................. 389
ABS ................................................ 278
Windshield wipers
Brakes ........................................... 277
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Check Engine ................................. 282
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 144
Coolant .......................................... 282
Switching on/off ........................... 143
Distance warning ........................... 284
Winter driving
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 284
Important safety notes .................. 346
ESP® .............................................. 279 Slippery road surfaces ................... 188
ESP® OFF ....................................... 280 Snow chains .................................. 347
Fuel tank ........................................ 282 Winter tires
Overview .......................................... 32 M+S tires ....................................... 346
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 50 Wiper blades
Reserve fuel ................................... 282 Cleaning ......................................... 322
Seat belt ........................................ 276 Important safety notes .................. 144
SRS ................................................ 281 Replacing ....................................... 144
Tire pressure monitor .................... 285 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 325
Warranty ............................................ 382 Workshops
Washer fluid see Qualified specialist workshop
Display message ............................ 274
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 371
Z
Wheel chock ...................................... 368
Wheels ZONE function
Changing a wheel .......................... 367 Switching on/off ........................... 156
Checking ........................................ 345
Cleaning ......................................... 322
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 367
Emergency spare wheel ................. 377
Important safety notes .................. 344
Interchanging/changing ................ 367
Mounting a new wheel ................... 371
Mounting a wheel .......................... 368
Removing a wheel .......................... 370
Storing ........................................... 367
Tightening torque ........................... 371
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 372
Wind deflector (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 321
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 49
Windows
see Side windows
 Introduction 21

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
Daimler's declared policy is one of consumption.
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner recommendations
that takes the requirements of both nature
Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account.
you to dispose of materials, first try to
You too can help to protect the environment regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
by operating your vehicle in an relevant environmental rules and regulations
environmentally responsible manner. when disposing of materials. In this way you
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, will help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
H Environmental note
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
consumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Devices, as well as control units and
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
them.
vehicle:
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Rdoors
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor pillars
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rdoor sills
qualified specialist workshop. Rseats
Personal driving style: Rcockpit

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster

starting the engine. Rcenter console
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Do not install accessories such as audio
is stationary. systems in these areas. Do not carry out
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance repairs or welding. You could impair the
from the vehicle in front. operating efficiency of the restraint
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and systems.
braking.

Z
22 Introduction

Have aftermarket accessories installed at The original purchase agreement lists all
a qualified specialist workshop. systems installed in your vehicle.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of Should you have any questions concerning
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels equipment and operation, please consult an
as well as accessories relevant to safety authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
which have not been approved by Mercedes. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
This could lead to malfunctions in safety- Booklet are important documents and should
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use be kept in the vehicle.
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically Service and vehicle operation
approved for your vehicle.
Service and literature
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
specifically developed, manufactured or warranties printed in the Service and
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz Warranty Information booklet. Your
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
should therefore be used. exchange or repair any defective parts
More than 300,000 different genuine originally installed in the vehicle in
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for accordance with the terms of the following
Mercedes-Benz models. warranties:
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz REmission Systems Warranty
parts for necessary service and repair work. REmission Performance Warranty
In addition, strategically located parts RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
delivery centers provide quick and reliable
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
parts service.
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Always specify the vehicle identification Control Systems Warranty
number (VIN) (Y page 382) and the engine RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
number (Y page 383) when ordering genuine
laws)
Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
not feature all functions described here. This
also applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
 Introduction 23

Information for customers in Maintenance

California
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a Always have the Service and Warranty
reasonable number of repair attempts Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service advisor will record every service for
one or more substantial defects or you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the Roadside Assistance
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a Program offers technical help in the event of
reasonable number of repair attempts is a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or Assistance Hotline are answered by our
more of the following occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or
(USA)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information, refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Assistance" section in the Service and
writing of the need for its repair, Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
(2) the same substantial defect or in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or change of
notified us in writing of the need for its ownership
repair, or In the event of a change of address, please
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of send us the "Notification of Address Change"
repair of the same or different substantial in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
total of more than 30 calendar days. Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
One Mercedes Drive contacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.

Z
24 Introduction

If you have purchased a used car, please send Operating safety

us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply Important safety notes
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
G WARNING
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or If you do not have the prescribed service/
Customer Service (Canada) at maintenance work or any required repairs
1-800-387-0100. carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/
Vehicle operation outside the USA maintenance work as well as any required
and Canada repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that: G WARNING
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may If you switch off the ignition while driving,
not be readily available. safety-relevant functions are only available
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel for example, the power steering and the brake
may cause damage to the catalytic boosting effect. You will require considerably
converter. more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower of an accident.
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available G WARNING
for delivery in Europe through our European Modifications to electronic components, their
Delivery Program. For details, consult an software as well as wiring can impair their
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to function and/or the function of other
one of the following addresses. networked components. In particular,
In the USA systems relevant to safety could also be
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC affected. As a result, these may no longer
function as intended and/or jeopardize the
European Delivery Department
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an
One Mercedes Drive increased risk of an accident and injury.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Never tamper with the wiring as well as
In Canada electronic components or their software. You
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. should have all work to electrical and
European Delivery Department electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.
a curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
or parts of the chassis
 Introduction 25

In situations like this, the body, the including interference that may cause
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or undesired operation of the device."
tires could be damaged without the
damage being visible. Components
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail Diagnostics connection
or, in the case of an accident, no longer
The diagnostics connection is only intended
withstand the strain they are designed to.
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
If the underbody paneling is damaged, a qualified specialist workshop.
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the G WARNING
underbody and the underbody paneling. If If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
these materials come in contact with hot connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
parts of the exhaust system for an operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
extended period, they can catch fire. the operating safety of the vehicle could be
In such cases, have the vehicle checked affected. There is a risk of an accident.
and repaired immediately at a qualified Do not connect any equipment to a
specialist workshop. If on continuing your diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
journey you notice that driving safety is
impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle G WARNING
immediately, paying attention to road and Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
qualified specialist workshop. The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Declarations of conformity stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
Vehicle components which receive the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
and/or transmit radio waves securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle loose floormats and do not place floormats on
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. top of one another.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause ! If the engine is switched off and
harmful interference, and 2) These devices equipment on the diagnostics connection
must accept any interference received, is used, the starter battery may discharge.
including interference that may cause Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
undesired operation. Changes or connection can lead to emissions monitoring
modifications not expressly approved by the information being reset, for example. This
party responsible for compliance could void may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
the user’s authority to operate the requirements of the next emissions test
equipment." during the main inspection.
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the Qualified specialist workshop
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
devices must accept any interference, qualified specialist workshop. It has the
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and

Z
26 Introduction

qualifications to correctly carry out the work In Canada

required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department
case for work relevant to safety. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Booklet.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects
Rservice and maintenance work USA only:
Rrepair work
The following text is published as required of
Ralterations, installation work and manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
modifications Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rwork on electronic components "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause
If you remove any warning stickers, you or injury or death, you should immediately
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Leave warning stickers in position. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Observe the following information when
driving your vehicle: If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Rtraffic rules and regulations However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to individual problems between you, your
motor vehicles dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
immediately to have the problem diagnosed motor vehicle safety from
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to http://www.safercar.gov
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
contact us at one of the following addresses. Limited Warranty
In the USA ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Customer Assistance Center about the proper operation of your vehicle
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC as well as about possible vehicle damage.
One Mercedes Drive Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
 Introduction 27

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. such data as:
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
operating
Data stored in the vehicle Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
Information about electronic data seat belts are fastened
acquisition in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the

(Including notice pursuant to California Code accelerator and/or brake pedal and
§ 9951) Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with This data can help provide a better
devices that can record vehicle systems data. understanding of the circumstances in which
If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
event of an accident. crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
This information helps, for example, to test the EDR under normal driving conditions and
vehicle systems after an accident and to no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
continually improve vehicle safety. and crash location) are recorded. However,
Daimler AG can access these data and submit other parties, such as law enforcement, can
them: combine the EDR data with the type of
personal identification data routinely
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis acquired during a crash investigation.
purposes
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
equipment is required, and access to the
Ron the instruction of prosecuting vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
authorities the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that as law enforcement, who have the special
involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or its equipment, can read the information if they
sales and service organizations have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law

Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

Information on copyright
AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and General information
transmitted by this system.
Information on license for free and open-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
source software used in your vehicle and its
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
electronic components is available on the
is to record data that will assist in
following website:
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed in certain crash or near crash-like http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
situations, such as during air bag deployment opensource
or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

Z
28
 29

Dashboard ........................................... 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 31
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33

At a glance
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel .............................. 39
 30 Dashboard

Dashboard
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle F Adjusts the steering wheel 124
shifters 176 Steering wheel heating 125
; Cruise control lever 189 G Combination switch 137
= Instrument cluster 31 H Parking brake 183
? Horn I Diagnostics connection 25
A DIRECT SELECT lever 172 J Opens the hood 312
B PARKTRONIC warning K Releases the parking brake 183
display 204
L Light switch 134
C Overhead control panel 38
D Climate control systems 148
E Ignition lock 165
Start/Stop button 165
 Instrument cluster 31

Instrument cluster
Displays

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Fuel gauge ? Multifunction display 234
; Coolant temperature 232 A Tachometer 232
= Speedometer with
segments 233

i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting

using the on-board computer
(Y page 244).
 32 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: ÷ ESP® 279 G ü Seat belts 276
; · Distance warning 284 H ? Coolant 282
= å ESP® OFF 279 I K High-beam
headlamps 138
? $ Brakes (USA only) 277
J L Low-beam
A J Brakes (Canada only) 277 headlamps 136
B #! Turn signals 137 K T Parking lamps 136
C ! ABS 278 L R This lamp has no
D 6 SRS function 136
281
M 8 Reserve fuel 282
E ; Check Engine 282
F h Tire pressure monitor 285
 Multifunction steering wheel 33

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multifunction display 234 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 233
separate operating 9:
instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 233
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms your selection 233
Control System; see the
separate operating Hides display messages 248
instructions B %
? ~ Back 233
Rejects or ends a call 239 Switches off the Voice
Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the
memory separate operating
6 instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
 34 Center console

Center console
Center console, upper section (Coupe)
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: COMAND; see the separate C 45 Indicator lamp 50
operating instructions
D ATA indicator lamp 78
; c Seat heating 122
E Moves the seat-belt
= s Seat ventilation 123 extender forwards 59
? c PARKTRONIC 204 F u Rear window roller
sunblind 295
A ¤ ECO start/stop
function 168
B £ Hazard warning
lamps 138
 Center console 35

Center console, upper section (Cabriolet)

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning
operating instructions lamps 138
; c Seat heating 122 C 45 Indicator lamp 50
= s Seat ventilation 123 D ATA indicator lamp 78
? Ò AIRSCARF 124 E Moves the seat-belt
extender forwards 59
A ¤ ECO start/stop
function 168 F Ò AIRSCARF 124
 36 Center console

Center console, lower section (Coupe)

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

G Cup holder 293 K Stowage compartment 288
H Stowage compartment 288 L Ú Selects the drive
Cup holder 293 program 175
I à Dynamic handling M COMAND controller; see
package with sports mode 203 the separate operating
instructions
J Stowage compartment 288
 Center console 37

Center console, lower section (Cabriolet)

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
G Cup holder 293 M Stowage compartment 288
H Stowage compartment 288 N Ü Retracts the rear seat
Cup holder 293 head restraints 119
I c PARKTRONIC 204 O Ú Selects the drive
à Dynamic handling program 175
package with sports mode 203 P COMAND controller; see
J AIRCAP 108 the separate operating
instructions
K Opens and closes the side
windows 94
L Opens and closes the soft
top 99
 38 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: u Switches the rear D Buttons for the garage door
interior lighting on/off 142 opener 306
; | Switches the E Microphone for mbrace
automatic interior lighting (emergency call system),
control on/off 142 telephone and the Voice
Control System; see the
= p Switches the right- separate operating
hand reading lamp on/off 141 instructions
? 3 Opens/closes the F F Roadside Assistance
panorama roof with power call button (mbrace
tilt/sliding panel with roller system) 299
sunblind 111
G p Switches the left-
A ï MB Info call button hand reading lamp on/off 141
(mbrace system) 300
H c Switches the front
B G SOS button (mbrace interior lighting on/off 142
system) 298
C Rear-view mirror 129
 Door control panel 39

Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page
: r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and
steering wheel 130
; Adjusts the seats
electrically 118
= %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 89
? Opens the door 88
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 127
B W Opens/closes the
side windows 94
C n Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment 68
D o Opens the trunk lid 92
40
 41

Useful information .............................. 42

Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 62
Driving safety systems ....................... 68

Safety
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 78
42 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes

models and all standard and optional G WARNING
equipment of your vehicle available at the Modifications to the restraint systems could
Safety

time of publication of the Operator's result in them not functioning properly any
Manual. Country-specific differences are more. The restraint systems could then no
possible. Please note that your vehicle may longer protect vehicle occupants as they are
not be equipped with all features designed to do and could fail in the event of
described. This also applies to safety- an accident or activate unexpectedly, for
related systems and functions. example. There is an increased risk of injury.
i Read the information on qualified Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
Panic alarm to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.
USA only: for further information contact our
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the most

important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
RSeat belts
RChild restraint systems
X To activate: press ! button : for at RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
least one second. system
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting Additional protection is provided by:
flashes. RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
X To deactivate: press ! button :
RNECK-PRO head restraints
again.
RPRE-SAFE®
or
RCabriolet: roll bar
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
RAir bag system components with:
or
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
Classification System (OCS)
vehicle.
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. Not all air bags are deployed in
an accident.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle as well as
 Occupant safety 43

restraint systems for infants and children, There is a malfunction if:

see "Children in the vehicle" Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
(Y page 62). up when the ignition is switched on
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) warning lamp does not go out after a few

Safety
seconds
Introduction Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS

RS consists of: warning lamp lights up again

RThe 6 RS warning lamp
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
RAir bags Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
RThe air bag control unit with crash sensors and air bags
REmergency Tensioning Device for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the G WARNING
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
rear
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
RS reduces the risk of occupants coming into installed or supplied by an authorized
contact with the vehicle's interior in the event Mercedes-Benz Center.
of an accident. It can also reduce the effect RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
of the forces to which occupants are
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
subjected during an accident.
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
SRS warning lamp environment. Check your national disposal
G WARNING guidelines. California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
system components may be triggered
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with a high rate of on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
vehicle deceleration. There is an increased that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately belt tensioners in addition to the
at a qualified specialist workshop. pyrotechnic ETDs.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
SRS functions are checked regularly when They could tear.
you switch on the ignition and when the RDo not make any modification that could
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
can be detected in good time. RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument severely weaken them. In a crash they may
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched not be able to provide adequate protection.
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds RNo modifications of any kind may be made
after the engine is started. to any components or wiring of the SRS.
The SRS components are in operational RDo not change or remove any component
readiness when the 6 SRS indicator lamp or part of the SRS.
goes out while the engine is running.

Z
44 Occupant safety

RDo not install additional trim material, seat equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
covers, badges, etc. over the steering applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag
cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,
door trim panels, or door frame trims. Air bags
Safety

RDo not install additional electrical/

Important safety notes
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring. G WARNING
RKeep area between air bags and occupants If you modify the air bag covers or affix objects
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, such as stickers to them, the air bags may not
umbrellas, etc.). function correctly. There is an increased risk
RCoupe: Do not hang items such as coat of injury.
hangers on the coat hooks or handles over Never modify the air bag covers or affix
the door. These items may be thrown objects to them.
around in the vehicle and cause head and
other injuries when the window curtain air G WARNING
bag is deployed. Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
RAir bag system components will be hot after even prevent deployment of the air bags
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
RNever place your feet on the instrument air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always they are designed to do. In addition, the
keep both feet on the floor in front of the function of the air bag deactivation system
seat. could be restricted. This poses an increased
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of injury or even fatal injury.
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or You should only use seat covers that have
causing unintended air bag deployment. been approved for the respective seat by
Work on the SRS must therefore only be Mercedes-Benz.
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz G WARNING
Center. The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has
RFor your protection and the protection of been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the
ETD, our safety instructions must be deployed air bags replaced at a qualified
followed. These instructions are available specialist workshop as soon as possible.
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. G WARNING
RGiven the considerable deployment speed, Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
required inflation volume, and the material of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
of the air bags, there is the possibility of Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-
abrasions or other, potentially more serious passenger front air bags and knee bag on
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. the driver's side)
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, pelvis
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
strongly recommends that you inform the air bags, window curtain air bags on the
subsequent owner that the vehicle is Coupe and head bags on the Cabriolet)
Rrollover in a Cabriolet (head bags)
 Occupant safety 45

However, no system available today can you have any difficulties, please contact an
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When the air bags are deployed, a small Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
amount of powder is released. The powder steering wheel or dashboard.
generally does not constitute a health hazard Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Safety
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
vehicle. In order to prevent potential increase the risk and potential severity of
breathing difficulties, you should leave the hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you inflates.
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, as possible from the dashboard when the
then get fresh air by opening a window or seat is occupied.
door.
Roccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
G WARNING
in the area of the door where the side
In order to reduce the potential danger of impact air bag (Coupe) or the side impact
injuries caused during the deployment of the air bag and the head bag (Cabriolet) inflate.
front air bags, the driver and front passenger This could result in serious injuries or death
must always be correctly seated and wear should the side impact air bags (Coupe) or
their seat belts. side impact air bags and head bag
For maximum protection in the event of a (Cabriolet) inflate. Always sit as upright as
collision, you must always be in the normal possible, wear the seat belt properly and
seat position with your back against the use an appropriately sized child restraint
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure system, infant restraint system or booster
that it is correctly positioned on your body. seat recommended for the size and weight
As the air bag inflates with considerable of the child.
speed and force, a proper seating position Failure to follow these instructions can result
and correct positioning of the hands on the in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are make the buyer aware of this safety
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated information. Be sure to give the buyer this
properly or are too close to the air bag can be Operator's Manual.
seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
inflates with great force instantaneously: If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and bang, and a small amount of powder may also
in a position that is as upright as possible be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
with your back against the backrest. affect your hearing. The powder that is
Rmove the driver's seat as far back as released generally does not constitute a
possible, still permitting proper operation health hazard and does not indicate that there
of vehicle controls. The distance from the is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
center of the driver's chest to the center of some temporary breathing difficulty for
the air bag cover on the steering wheel people with asthma or other breathing
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
should be able to accomplish this by of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If You can also open the window to allow fresh
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up.
Z
46 Occupant safety

The air bag installation locations are Front air bags

identified by the AIR BAG symbol.
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
the event of such a situation will the air bags
provide their supplemental protection.
Safety

If the driver and front passenger do not wear

their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
driver and passenger will then be protected steering wheel; front-passenger front air
to the extent possible by a properly fastened bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also box.
needed to provide the best possible The front air bags increase protection for the
protection in a rollover. driver's and front passenger's head and
Air bags provide additional protection; they chest.
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. They are deployed:
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
equipped with air bags or not. of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
It is important for your safety and that of your
Rif the system determines that air bag
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags deployment can offer additional protection
repaired. This will help to make sure the air to that provided by the seat belt
bags continue to perform their protective Rindependently of other air bags in the
function for the vehicle occupants in the vehicle
event of a crash. The release time of the front air bags is
i After an air bag has been deployed, have dependent upon the use of the seat belt.
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is generally not deployed.
ready to drive. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. In the first deployment stage,
the front air bag is filled with enough
propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
The deployment of the front-passenger front
air bag is also influenced by the weight
category of the front passenger, which is
 Occupant safety 47

determined by the Occupant Classification The driver's knee bag increases protection of
System (OCS) (Y page 50). the driver against:
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the Rknee injuries
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required Rthighinjuries
(predicted at the start of the impact) for Rlower leg injuries
second-stage inflation of the front-passenger

Safety
front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum Side impact air bags
amount of propellant gas available. G WARNING
The front air bags are not deployed in Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
situations where a low impact severity is even prevent deployment of the air bags
predicted. You will then be protected by the integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
fastened seat belt. air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
The front-passenger front air bag will only they are designed to do. In addition, the
deploy if: function of the air bag deactivation system
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight could be restricted. This poses an increased
sensor readings, detects that the front- risk of injury or even fatal injury.
passenger seat is occupied You should only use seat covers that have
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator been approved for the respective seat by
lamp on the center console is not lit Mercedes-Benz.
(Y page 50)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high G WARNING
impact severity Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not
Driver's knee bag performed correctly to the doors or door
paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead
to the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly any more. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the You should only use seat covers that have
steering column. It is deployed together with been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
the front air bags. The driver's knee bag is Benz. The seat covers must have a special
designed to operate together with the front tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,
air bags in frontal impacts if certain the side impact air bags cannot deploy
thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee correctly and therefore cannot provide the
bag operates best in conjunction with intended protection in the event of an
correctly positioned and fastened seat belts. accident.

Z
48 Occupant safety

The side impact air bag on the front-

passenger side is not deployed in the
following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Safety

Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not

fastened.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
Side impact air bags (example: Coupe) whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
Front side impact air bags : and rear side or not.
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
seat cushions. Head bags
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection for the thorax of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs. However, they
do not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms

The side impact air bags are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occurs Example: head bag on the front-passenger side
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate Head bags : are available in the Cabriolet.
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Head bags : enhance the level of protection
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt for the head, but not chest or arms, of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
Rindependently of the front air bags
on which the impact occurs.
Rindependently of the ETDs
Head bags : deploy in the area of the side
Cabriolet: if the vehicle rolls over, the side windows at the front. They are deployed:
impact air bags are generally not deployed.
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Side impact air bags are deployed if the
system detects high vehicle deceleration or of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
determines that side impact air bag Ron the side on which an impact occurs
deployment can offer additional protection to Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
that provided by the seat belt. the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side system determines that air bag deployment
impacts which do not exceed the system's can offer the vehicle occupants additional
preset deployment thresholds for lateral protection to that provided by the seat belt
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
protected by the fastened seat belt. Rindependently of the front air bags
 Occupant safety 49

Head bags will not deploy in side impacts The pelvis air bags deploy next to and below
which do not exceed the system's preset the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
deployment thresholds for lateral Ron the side on which an impact occurs
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
protected by the fastened seat belt.
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
The head bag on the front-passenger side is

Safety
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
not deployed in the following situations: Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
Rindependently of the front air bags
seat is unoccupied. Rindependently of the ETDs
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
Cabriolet: if the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis
fastened.
air bags are generally not deployed. Side
The head bag on the front-passenger side will impact air bags are deployed if the system
deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is detects high vehicle deceleration or
fastened, regardless of whether the front- acceleration in a lateral direction and
passenger seat is occupied or not. determines that side impact air bag
deployment can offer additional protection to
Pelvis air bags that provided by the seat belt.
G WARNING Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side
Only use seat covers which have been tested impacts which do not exceed the system's
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your preset deployment thresholds for lateral
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side protected by the fastened seat belt.
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is not deployed in the following situations:
for availability. ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is
fastened, regardless of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Pelvis air bags : enhance the level of

protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.

Z
50 Occupant safety

Window curtain air bags are available in the being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Coupe. 12-month-old child in a standard child
Window curtain air bags : enhance the level restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
of protection for the head, but not chest or illuminate when the engine is started and
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of remain illuminated. This indicates that the
Safety

the vehicle on which the impact occurs. front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The window curtain air bags are integrated When the OCS senses that the front
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the area extending from the front door (A- the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
pillar) to the rear sidewall (C-pillar). when the engine is started and remain
Window curtain air bags are deployed: illuminated. This indicates that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or When the OCS senses that the front
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
month-old child seated in a standard child
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
restraint or as being a small individual (such
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger as a young teenager or a small adult), the
seat is occupied 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
Rindependently of the front air bags approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in started. Depending on occupant weight
the event of impacts which do not exceed the sensor readings from the seat, it will then
system's preset deployment thresholds for remain illuminated or go out. With the
vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the
then be protected by the fastened seat belt. front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
With the 45 indicator lamp out, the
front passenger front air bag is activated.
Occupant Classification System When the OCS senses that the front
(OCS) passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
Method of operation individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
G WARNING illuminate for approximately six seconds
when the engine is started and then go out.
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
This indicates that the front passenger front
when an adult or someone larger than a small
air bag is activated.
individual is in the passenger seat, have the
passenger position him/herself in the seat If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
until the 45 indicator lamp goes out. the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag If the 45 indicator lamp is not
deployment when the OCS has classified the illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
front passenger seat occupant as weighing as is activated and will be deployed
much as or less than a typical 12-month-old Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
child in a standard child restraint or if the front Rif the impact exceeds a predetermined
passenger seat is classified as being empty. triggering threshold
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
 Occupant safety 51

RCoupe: independent of the side impact air with the weight of a standard appropriate
bag or pelvis air bag child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
RCabriolet: independent of the side impact RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
air bag, pelvis air bag or head bag front-passenger seat will be seriously
If the front passenger front air bag is injured or even killed if the front-passenger

Safety
deployed, the rate of inflation will be front air bag inflates in a collision which
influenced by could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
by the air bag control unit
this risk completely is never to place a child
Rthe front passenger's weight category as in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
identified by the OCS passenger seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
G WARNING in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear
According to accident statistics, children are seat.
safer when properly restrained on the rear RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, the front-passenger seat, make sure the
we strongly recommend that children be 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
placed in the rear seats whenever possible. indicating that the front-passenger front air
Regardless of seating position, children 12 bag is deactivated. Should the 45
years old and under must be seated and indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
properly secured in an appropriate infant the restraint is installed, please check
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat installation. Periodically check the
recommended for the size and weight of the 45 indicator lamp while driving to
child. make sure that the 45 indicator
The infant or child restraint must be properly lamp is illuminated. If the 45
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do
belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors not transport a child on the front-passenger
and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with seat until the system has been repaired.
the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Occupants, especially children, should always front-passenger seat will be seriously
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt injured or even killed if the front-passenger
properly and use an appropriately sized infant front air bag inflates.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
recommended for the size and weight of the
restraint on the front-passenger seat:
child.
- move the seat as far back as possible
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
- use the proper child restraint
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances recommended for the age, size and
require you to place a child in the front- weight of the child
passenger seat: - secure child restraint with the vehicle's

RYour
seat belt according to the child seat
vehicle is equipped with air bag
manufacturer's instructions
technology designed to deactivate the
RFor children larger than the typical 12-
front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a month-old child, the front-passenger front
typical 12-month-old child or less along air bag may or may not be activated.

Z
52 Occupant safety

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the lamp is lit, the passenger air bag is disabled.
instrument cluster and the 45 The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the shows you the current status.
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger The system does not deactivate:
Safety

front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Rthe side impact air bag
Have the system checked by qualified Rthe pelvis air bag
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
Rthe window curtain air bag (Coupe)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthe front-passenger head bag (Cabriolet)
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

In order to ensure proper operation of the air To be classified correctly, the front passenger
bag system and OCS: must sit:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
position that is as upright as possible with Rin a position that is as upright as possible
your back against the seat backrest. with their back against the seat backrest
RWhen seated, a passenger should not Rwith their feet on the floor
position him/herself in such a way as to The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if
cause the passenger's weight to be lifted the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by
from the seat cushion as this may result in leaning on the armrest.
the OCS being unable to correctly If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
approximate the passenger's weight the seat cushion are damaged, have the
category. necessary repair work carried out at a
RRead and observe all warnings in this qualified specialist workshop.
chapter. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use seat
accessories that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should always observe the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of
whether or not the front passenger is
positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag
display messages that can be displayed in the
instrument cluster (Y page 256).
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition mean that the front-passenger front air bag
lock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAG will also deploy.
OFF indicator lamp : does not light up.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the occupant on the front-
passenger seat using a weight sensor.
The front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated automatically for certain weight
categories.
 Occupant safety 53

The OCS may have detected that the seat: The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a lights up:
typical child up to twelve months old, Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock
seated in a child restraint system. to position 1 or 2
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop

Safety
young teenager or a small adult. button once or twice on vehicles with
Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint KEYLESS-GO
system whose weight is greater than that Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-
of a typical twelve month old child. passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
These are examples of when the OCS occupant as an adult
deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Deactivation takes place although the lamp goes out again after approximately six
collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the seconds.
driver's air bag. If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
For further information, see "Air bag display detects that the front-passenger seat is
messages" (Y page 256). empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp will continue to light up. The
System self-test PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
will not go out.
G WARNING For more information about the OCS, see
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not "Problems with the Occupant Classification
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You System" (Y page 54).
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.

G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect the
function of the OCS. This could result in the
front-passenger front air bag not functioning
as intended during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. Make
sure that the bottom and back of the child
restraint system make full contact with the
front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.

Z
54 Occupant safety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Safety

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
lights up and remains position.
on. X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
The person on the specialist workshop.
front-passenger seat: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
Rhas the weight of a display (Y page 256).
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
 Occupant safety 55

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or stays on.

Safety
X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint
The front-passenger system are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If
seat is: necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Runoccupied X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Roccupied with the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
weight of a child up passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
to twelve months old being pulled too tightly.
in a child restraint X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
system X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the OCS checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat
until the OCS has been repaired.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 256).

Roll bar (Cabriolet) When the roll bars are extended, the rear
head restraints also extend automatically.
G DANGER Once the roll bars are extended, you can no
If the roll bar is malfunctioning, the A longer lower the rear head restraints. The soft
Malfunction Service Required message top can no longer be closed. In this case, visit
appears in the multifunction display. The roll the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
bars will then possibly not be extended in the
event of an accident. This could result in
severe or even fatal injuries to you and other NECK-PRO head restraints
occupants. In this case, visit a qualified
specialist workshop immediately and have Important safety notes
the roll bar checked. G WARNING
Do not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers)
G WARNING on the NECK-PRO head restraints. Otherwise,
Ensure that the area around the roll bars/rear the NECK-PRO head restraints may not
head restraints is kept clear. Otherwise, function properly, or in the event of a rear-end
someone could be injured by the roll bars collision may not be able offer the level of
when they are triggered. protection they are designed to provide.
The roll bars are under the rear head
G WARNING
restraints. They are extended if systems
detect that the vehicle is in danger of Seat or head restraint covers can cause a
overturning. malfunction when the NECK-PRO head

Z
56 Occupant safety

restraints are activated or when the side not become caught between the head
impact air bags or pelvis air bags are restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to
deployed, or they can prevent this completely. observe this could result in injuries.
The NECK-PRO head restraints or side impact
air bags/pelvis air bags can therefore not
Safety

provide the intended protection. Do not use

any seat or head restraint covers.

G WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for NECK-PRO head restraint (example: Coupe)
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
accident or similar situation.
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
G WARNING
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO head
restraints checked at a qualified specialist down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
workshop after a rear-end collision. it will go.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
The NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the cushion back in the direction of arrow =
likelihood of head and chest injuries. The until the cushion engages.
NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and X Repeat this procedure for the second
front-passenger seats are moved forwards NECK-PRO head restraint.
and upwards in the event of a rear-end
collision of a certain severity. This provides i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
better head support. requires a lot of strength. If you have
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head
triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO restraints, have this work carried out at a
head restraints on the driver’s and front- qualified specialist workshop.
passenger seat (Y page 56). Otherwise, the
additional protection will not be available in
the event of another rear-end collision. You PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
can recognize when NECK-PRO head protection system)
restraints have been triggered by the fact that ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
they have moved forwards and can no longer footwell or behind the seats when resetting
be adjusted. the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous
G WARNING situations. Despite your vehicle being
When pushing back the NECK-PRO head equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the
restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do
 Occupant safety 57

possibility of personal injuries occurring as a Information about seat belt adjustment, a

result of an accident cannot be eliminated. convenience function integrated into PRE-
Always adapt your driving style to suit the SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt
prevailing road and weather conditions and adjustment" section (Y page 60).
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front. Drive carefully.

Safety
PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Seat belts
Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency Important safety notes
braking situations.
Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on
G WARNING
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
upright position. When braking or in the event
radar sensor system detects an imminent of an accident, you could slide underneath the
danger of collision in certain situations. seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
physical limits are exceeded and the risk of injury or even fatal injury.
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures your journey. Always make sure that the seat
depending on the hazardous situation is in the upright position.
detected:
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. G WARNING
Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
in an unfavorable position. Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,
Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the bleached or dyed
seat cushion and seat backrest of the front Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
multicontour seats is increased. extremely dirty
RCoupe: if the vehicle skids, the panorama Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the
roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the belt anchorage has been modified.
front side windows are closed so that only Damage caused to seat belts in an accident
a small gap remains. may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.
RCabriolet: if the vehicle skids, the front side Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
windows are closed so that only a small gap fail, for example in the event of an accident.
remains. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
If the hazardous situation passes without be deployed unintentionally or fail to be
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens deployed when required. There is an
the belt pre-tensioning. The air pressure in increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
the side bolsters on the multicontour seat is Never modify seat belts, Emergency
reduced again. All settings made by PRE- Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and
SAFE® can then be reversed. inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not
If the seat belts are not released: damaged or worn and are clean.
X When the vehicle is stationary, move the Only use seat belts that have been approved
backrest or seat back slightly. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.

Z
58 Occupant safety

The use of seat belts and infant and child RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
restraint systems is required by law in: arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
Rall 50 states In a frontal crash, your body would move
Rthe U.S. territories too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
Rthe District of Columbia
Safety

belt would also apply too much force to the

Rall Canadian provinces
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
Even where this is not required by law, all injure internal organs such as your liver or
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten spleen.
their seat belts before starting the journey. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
i See "Children in the vehicle" section is located as close as possible to
(Y page 62) for further information on the middle of the shoulder. It should not
infants and children traveling in the vehicle touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
as well as on child restraint systems. portion of the seat belt under your arm.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
Correct use of the seat belts your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
G WARNING abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY a crash.
RSeat belts can only work when used RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

properly. Never wear seat belts in any other breakable objects in or on your clothing,
way than as described in this section, as such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
that could result in serious injuries in the these might cause injuries.
event of an accident. RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
REach occupant should wear their seat belt snugly. Take special care of this when
at all times, because seat belts help reduce wearing loose clothing.
the likelihood of and potential severity of RNever use a seat belt for more than one
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
The integrated restraint system includes around a person and another person or
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee other objects at the same time.
bag, front-passenger front air bag, pelvis air RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
bags, side impact air bags, Coupe: window crash, you would not have the full width of
curtain air bags for side windows, Cabriolet: the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
head bags), Emergency Tensioning Devices The twisted seat belt against your body
(ETDs), seat belt force limiters, and front could cause injuries.
seat knee bolsters. RPregnant women should also always use a
The system is designed to enhance the lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
protection offered to properly belted should be positioned as low as possible on
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side the abdomen.
(side impact air bags, pelvis air bags, RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts as upright as possible.
which exceed preset deployment
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window
sure it is properly positioned.
curtain air bags and ETDs).
 Occupant safety 59

RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

Safety
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.

Fastening seat belts

Seat-belt extender (example: Coupe)
G WARNING
The seat-belt extender for the driver and front
According to accident statistics, children are
passenger helps you fasten your seat belt.
safer when properly restrained on the rear
Seat-belt extender : is extended when the
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be respective door is closed and the SmartKey
placed in the rear seat whenever possible. is turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. You can also extend seat-belt extender : by
using seat-belt extender button A in the
G WARNING center console.
Seat belt presenter : must be retracted X Press seat-belt extender button A.
while the vehicle is in motion. Only when seat Seat-belt extender : extends.
belt presenter : is retracted can the seat Seat-belt extender : is retracted again if:
belt be properly positioned on the body and
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt
protect the occupant as intended.
buckle.
Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
belt buckle within 60 seconds.
Rthe respective door is opened.
Rthe SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the
ignition lock.
Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it
forwards.
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
after, approximately five seconds.

Z
60 Occupant safety

If you press seat-belt extender button A The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
after this, seat-belt extender : will not Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
extend. buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
Safety

lock and you then engage the belt tongue

in the buckle once the seat-belt extender
has retracted.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
adjustment on and off in the on-board
computer (Y page 246).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
Seat belt (example: Coupe) under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
protection)" (Y page 56).
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 116).
Releasing seat belts
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt
extender :. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
section of the seat belt across the middle will be trapped in the door or in the seat
of your shoulder and the lap section across mechanism. This could damage the door,
your pelvis. the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
their protective function and must be
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
driver's and front-passenger seat belts workshop.
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 60).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
Information on releasing the seat belt with
release button ?(Y page 60).

Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
 Occupant safety 61

with increasing intensity for a maximum of

60 seconds or until the driver or front
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a

Safety
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the seat belt
warning lamp 7 flashes again if the vehicle
Seat belt (example: Coupe) speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
X Guide belt tongue ; to belt sash
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
guide :.
have fastened their seat belts.
or
Belt warning for the driver and front
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and front- i For more information on the 7 seat
passenger seat belts have already been belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
lights up for six seconds each time the engine seat belts" (Y page 276).
is started. It then goes out if the driver and
the front passenger have already fastened Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
their seat belts. belt force limiters
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when G WARNING
the engine is started, an additional warning
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
that have been deployed are no longer
a maximum of six seconds or once the
operational and are unable to perform their
driver's seat belt is fastened.
intended protective function. This poses an
If after six seconds, the driver or front increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency
and the doors are closed:
Tensioning Devices which have been
Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit triggered immediately replaced at a qualified
as long as the driver's or front-passenger's specialist workshop.
seat belt is not fastened
and ! If the front-passenger seat is not
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is occupied, do not engage the seat belt
exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp tongue in the buckle on the front-
passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds

Z
62 Children in the vehicle

Tensioning Device could be triggered in the health hazard and does not indicate that there
event of an accident. is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency
people with asthma or other breathing
Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
electric motor can be deployed as often as
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Safety

desired and do not need to be replaced.

You can also open the window to allow fresh
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
in the rear are equipped with Emergency warning lamp lights up.
Tensioning Devices and seat belt force If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
limiters. belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
pulling them close against the body. occupant is reduced.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. are synchronized with the front air bags,
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back which absorb part of the deceleration force.
towards the backrest. This results in the force exerted on the
The ETDs can only be activated when: occupant being distributed over a greater
area.
Rthe ignition is switched on
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see Automatic comfort-fit feature
"SRS warning lamp 6" (Y page 43)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on The front seat belts have an automatic
each of the front seat belts comfort-fit feature. The automatic comfort-fit
feature reduces the retraction force of the
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
seat belts. This results in increased seat belt
compartment are triggered independently of
comfort.
the lock status of the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
and severity of an accident: Children in the vehicle
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end
Child restraint systems
collision if the vehicle decelerates or
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal Important safety notes
direction during the initial stages of the
impact. G WARNING
Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle According to accident statistics, children are
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a safer when properly restrained in the rear
lateral direction on the side opposite to the seating positions than in the front seating
impact. position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
RCabriolet: in certain situations if the vehicle children be placed in the rear seats whenever
rolls over and the system determines that possible. Regardless of seating position,
it can provide additional protection children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
and a small amount of powder may also be
seat recommended for the size and weight of
released. Only in rare cases will the bang
the child.
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
 Children in the vehicle 63

The infant or child restraint must be properly passenger front air bag is deactivated.
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and illuminate or go out while the restraint is
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the installed, please check installation.
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Periodically check the 4 5 indicator

Safety
Occupants, especially children, should always lamp while driving to make sure the 4
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt 5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
properly and use an appropriately sized infant 4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat remains out, do not transport a child on the
recommended for the size and weight of the front passenger seat until the system has
child. been repaired.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
an inflating air bag. Note the following front passenger seat will be seriously
important information when circumstances injured or even killed if the front passenger
require you to place a child in the front front air bag inflates.
passenger seat: RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag facing child restraint on the front passenger
technology designed to deactivate the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
passenger front air bag in your vehicle use the proper child restraint
when the system senses the weight of a recommended for the age, size and weight
typical 12-month-old child or less along of the child, and secure child restraint with
with the weight of a standard appropriate the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child restraint on the front passenger seat. child seat manufacturer's instructions.
RFor children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger G WARNING
front air bag may or may not be activated. If the child restraint system is installed
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front protect as intended. The child cannot then be
passenger front air bag is deactivated. restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the braking or sudden changes of direction. There
front passenger seat will be seriously is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
injured or even killed if the front passenger fatal.
front air bag inflates in a collision which Make sure that you observe the child restraint
could occur under some circumstances, system manufacturer's installation
even with the air bag technology installed instructions and the notes on use. Please
in your vehicle. The only means to ensure, that the base of the child restraint
completely eliminate this risk is to never system is always resting completely on the
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.
in the front seat. We therefore strongly cushions, under or behind the child restraint
recommend that you always place a child system. Only use child restraint systems with
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. the original cover designed for them. Only
RIf you must install a rear-facing child replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do G WARNING
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator If the child restraint system is installed
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front incorrectly or is not secured, it can come

Z
64 Children in the vehicle

loose in the event of an accident, heavy shoulder belt fits properly without a booster
braking or a sudden change in direction. The seat.
child restraint system could be thrown about, When the child restraint is not in use, remove
striking vehicle occupants. There is an it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. belt to prevent the child restraint from
Safety

Always install child restraint systems becoming a projectile in the event of an

properly, even if they are not being used. accident.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation G WARNING
instructions. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
G WARNING Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Child restraint systems or their securing people or road users.
systems which have been damaged or
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
subjected to a load in an accident can no
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
longer protect as intended. The child cannot
then be restrained in the event of an accident, Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. motion if, for example, they:
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly Rrelease the parking brake.
even fatal. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
Replace child restraint systems which have park position P
been damaged or subjected to a load in an RStart the engine.
accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint There is a risk of an accident and injury.
system checked at a qualified specialist When leaving the vehicle, always take the
workshop, before you install a child restraint SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
system again. leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
G WARNING reach of children.
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event G WARNING
of an accident, they could be crushed If persons, particularly children are subjected
between the occupant and seat belt. to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
significantly increased if the child restraints fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ vehicle.
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. G WARNING
Children that are too large for a child restraint If the child restraint system is subjected to
must travel in seats using normal seat belts. direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest Children may burn themselves on these parts,
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster particularly on the metal parts of the child
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/ you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
 Children in the vehicle 65

Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
child restraint system has been exposed to interior or on the infant or child restraint.
direct sunlight, let it cool down before
securing the child in it. Never leave children Special seat belt retractor
unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING

Safety
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: If the seat belt is released while driving, the
RSecure the child with a child or infant seat child restraint system will no longer be
restraint system appropriate to the age and secured properly. The special seat belt
weight of the child. retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws
in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt
RMake sure that the infant or child is
cannot be immediately refastened. There is
properly secured at all times while the an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always attention to road and traffic conditions.
properly secure all infants and children with Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and
a child or infant seat restraint system for the secure the child restraint system properly.
trip.
The use of seat belts and infant and child Installing a child restraint system:
restraint systems is required by law in: X Always comply with the manufacturer's
Rall 50 states installation instructions.
Rthe U.S. territories X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
Rthe District of Columbia belt retractor.
Rall Canadian provinces X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

Infants and children must always be seated in buckle.

an appropriate infant or child restraint system Activating the special seat belt retractor:
recommended for the size and weight of the
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
child. The infant or child restraint system
belt retractor retract it again.
must be properly secured in accordance with
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
the manufacturer's instructions.
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
All infant or child restraint systems must meet belt retractor is activated.
the following standards:
X Push down on the child restraint system to
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety take up any slack.
Standards 213 and 225
Removing a child restraint system/
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
X Always comply with the manufacturer's
corresponds to the standards can be found installation instructions.
on an instruction label on the child restraint X Press the seat belt release button and
system. This confirmation can also be found guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
in the installation instructions that are The special seat belt retractor is
included with the child restraint system. deactivated.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's For more information about releasing the seat
instructions when using an infant or child belt with the release button, see "Releasing
restraint system or booster seat. seat belts" (Y page 60).

Z
66 Children in the vehicle

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

in the rear
G WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
Safety

children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs

(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury. Cabriolet
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), Securing rings : are located between the
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint seat cushion and the seat backrest.
systems with which the child is also secured X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the restraint system on both LATCH-type
child restraint system with the Top Tether (ISOFIX) securing rings :. Comply with the
belt, if available.
child restraint system manufacturer's
When installing a child restraint system, be instructions when installing the LATCH-
sure to observe the manufacturer's type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.
installation instructions and the instructions LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
for correct use of the child restraint system. securing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. The
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
are installed on the left and right of the rear
seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
seat according to the manufacturer's
instructions.

Coupe Top Tether

Installation instructions : indicate the
Top Tether anchorages
installation location of securing rings ;.
X To install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child G WARNING
restraint system in the Coupe: press the If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
upholstery over both slots above securing could fold forwards in the event of an
rings ; to the side. accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
 Children in the vehicle 67

Always lock rear seat backrests after X Press down the rear of cover ; in the
installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock direction of the arrow.
verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat Cover ; is raised slightly at the front.
backrests so that they are positioned X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
vertically. =.

Safety
X Depending on the model and version, and
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child according to the manufacturer's
restraint system secured with LATCH-type installation instructions, route Top Tether
(ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reduce belt A on the left and right past head
the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint :.
restraint system is equipped with Top Tether, or
this should always be used. X Route Top Tether belt A over the center of
The Top Tether anchorage points are installed the head restraint.
in the rear compartment behind the head X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
restraints.
anchorage =.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning twisted.
tone also sounds. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether
belt A is tight.

Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
The Coupe has Top Tether anchorages.
park position P
RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Z
68 Driving safety systems

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Safety

G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
G WARNING rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they only possible using the switches in the
could: driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off,
operation is possible using the switches in
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
the rear compartment.
or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic Driving safety systems
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped Overview of driving safety systems
There is a risk of an accident and injury. In this section, you will find information about
Always activate the child-proof locks and the following driving safety systems:
override feature if children are traveling in the RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take (Y page 69)
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 69)
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with

You can activate the child-proof lock for the Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 70)
rear side windows (Y page 68). RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance
warning function and adaptive Brake
Override feature for the rear side Assist) (Y page 71)
windows RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 74)
G WARNING
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
(Y page 75)
activate the override switch. Otherwise the
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76)
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves in the rear side window. RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style or
become distracted, the driving safety
systems can neither reduce the risk of
 Driving safety systems 69

accident nor override the laws of physics. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
Driving safety systems are merely aids immediately at a qualified specialist
designed to assist driving. You are workshop.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
good time. Always adapt your driving style to including driving safety systems, will also

Safety
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic become inoperative. Observe the information
conditions and maintain a safe distance from on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 278) and
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 249).
i The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
is adequate contact between the tires and (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface
the road surface. Please pay special conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
attention to the notes on tires, even if you only brake gently.
recommended minimum tire tread depths,
etc. (Y page 344). Braking
In wintry driving conditions, always use X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, brake pedal vigorously until the braking
snow chains. Only in this way will the situation is over.
driving safety systems described in this X To make a full brake application:
section work as effectively as possible. depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
General information indication of hazardous road conditions, and
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way functions as a reminder to take extra care
that the wheels do not lock when you brake. while driving.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition General information
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
running. BAS operates in emergency braking
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
Important safety notes
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 68). Important safety notes
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes"
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when section (Y page 68).
braking. The steerability and braking
G WARNING
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
are deactivated. There is an increased danger in an emergency braking situation is
of skidding and accidents. increased. There is a risk of an accident.

Z
70 Driving safety systems

In an emergency braking situation, depress BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian
the wheels from locking. and reduce the effects of such a collision. If
BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you
are assisted when braking.
Braking
Safety

X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until Important safety notes
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. G WARNING
The brakes will function as usual once you BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
Rintervene unnecessarily
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Rnot intervene
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
There is a risk of an accident.
General information Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
section (Y page 68).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with G WARNING
the Driving Assistance package. BAS PLUS does not react:
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the Rto small people, e.g. children
radar sensor system and the camera system
Rto animals
must be operational.
Rto oncoming vehicles
With the help of a sensor system and a
camera system, BAS PLUS can detect Rwhen cornering
obstacles: As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an critical situations. There is a risk of an
extended period of time accident.
Rthat cross the path of your vehicle Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using recognition can be impaired.
typical characteristics such as the body Recognition by the radar sensor system is
contours and posture of a person standing also impaired in the event of:
upright.
Rdirton the sensors or anything else
If the radar sensor system or the camera
covering the sensors
system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS
Rinterference by other radar sources
functions are restricted or no longer
available. The brake system is still available Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" motorbike
section“ (Y page 70).
 Driving safety systems 71

Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line brake pressure to a value adapted to the
Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar traffic situation.
sensor system detection range BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in
Recognition by the camera system is also hazardous situations with vehicles in front
impaired in the event of: within a speed range between 4 mph
(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).

Safety
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is
covered At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS reacts to:
from the sun being low in the sky Rstationary objects in the path of your
Rdarkness vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Rif:
Robjects crossing your path
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high
- the camera system no longer recognizes braking force, preventative passenger
a pedestrian as a person due to special protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
clothing or other objects activated simultaneously.
- a pedestrian is concealed by other X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
objects emergency braking situation is over.
- the typical outline of a person is not ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
distinguishable from the background BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes
Following damage to the front end of the function as usual, if:
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
Ryou release the brake pedal
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. vehicle
Following damage to the windshield, have the Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
configuration and operation of the camera Ryou activate kickdown
system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Function
General notes
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if: COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
the distance warning function and adaptive
Ryou approach an obstacle, and Brake Assist, which are described in the
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision following section.
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, Distance warning function
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last Important safety notes
possible moment. i Observe the "Important safety notes"
When driving at a speed above 20 mph section (Y page 68).
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the

Z
72 Driving safety systems

G WARNING front. An intermittent warning tone will then

The distance warning function does not react: sound, and the · distance warning lamp
will light up in the instrument cluster.
Rto people or animals
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Rto oncoming vehicles
distance from the vehicle in front.
Rto crossing traffic
Safety

or
Rwhen cornering
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to
Thus, the distance warning function cannot do so.
provide a warning in all critical situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
conditions may also cause the system to
situation and be ready to brake.
display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
G WARNING
distance warning function can detect
The distance warning function cannot always
obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
for an extended period of time.
situations.
From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h),
In such cases, the distance warning function
the distance warning function can also react
may:
to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
Rgive an unnecessary warning parked vehicles.
Rnot give a warning If you approach an obstacle and the distance
There is a risk of an accident. warning function detects a risk of a collision,
Always pay careful attention to the traffic the system will initially alert you both visually
situation and do not rely solely on the distance and acoustically.
warning function. In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Function Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
X To activate/deactivate: activate or covering the sensors
deactivate the distance warning function in Rsnow or heavy rain
the on-board computer (Y page 241).
Rinterference by other radar sources
If the distance warning function is not Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
activated, the æ symbol appears in the example in parking garages
assistance graphics display. Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
The distance warning function can help you motorbike
to minimize the risk of a front-end collision Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
relative to the center of your vehicle
such a collision. If the distance warning
function detects that there is a risk of a Following damage to the front end of the
collision, you will be warned visually and vehicle, have the configuration and operation
acoustically. The distance warning function of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
cannot prevent a collision without your specialist workshop. This also applies to
intervention. collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function
warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in
 Driving safety systems 73

Adaptive Brake Assist automatically increase the braking force to a

level suitable for the traffic conditions.
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
section (Y page 68).
emergency braking situation is over.
G WARNING ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Safety
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly The brakes will work normally again if:
identify objects and complex traffic
Ryou release the brake pedal
situations.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:
collision
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Rnot intervene vehicle
There is a risk of an accident. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. of reacting to moving objects that have
already been recognized as such at least once
G WARNING over the period of observation. Adaptive
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Brake Assist does not react to stationary
Rto people or animals obstacles.
Rto oncoming vehicles If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due
Rto crossing traffic to a malfunction in the radar sensor system,
the brake system remains available with full
Rto stationary obstacles
brake boosting effect and BAS.
Rwhen cornering
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not be impaired if there is:
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
risk of an accident.
covering the sensors
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
Rsnow or heavy rain
situation and be ready to brake.
Rinterference by other radar sources
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
during hazardous situations at speeds above example in parking garages
4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensor Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
system to evaluate the traffic situation. motorbike
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
distance warning signal can detect obstacles relative to the center of your vehicle
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
Following damage to the front end of the
extended period of time.
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
Should you approach an obstacle and of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of specialist workshop. This also applies to
collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the collisions at low speeds where there is no
braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
collision. Should you apply the brakes
vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will

Z
74 Driving safety systems

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Application of the brakes by ESP® may

otherwise destroy the brake system.
General notes
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
i Observe the "Important safety notes" performance tests may only be carried out
section (Y page 68). on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you
Safety

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, operate the vehicle on such a
i.e. power transmission between the tires and dynamometer, please consult a qualified
the road surface. workshop. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the on ESP®(Y page 337) when towing the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to vehicle with a raised rear axle.
keep the vehicle on the desired course within ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when in the instrument cluster lights up
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® continuously when the engine is running.
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) available due to a malfunction.
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Observe the information on warning lamps
Traction control brakes the drive wheels (Y page 279) and display messages which
individually if they spin. This enables you to may be shown in the instrument cluster
pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, (Y page 249).
for example if the road surface is slippery on i Only use wheels with the recommended
one side. In addition, more drive torque is tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
transferred to the wheel or wheels with properly.
traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you Characteristics of ESP®
deactivate ESP®.
General information
Important safety notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
i Observe the "Important safety notes" beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
section (Y page 68).
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
G WARNING lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
If ESP® intervenes:
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
driving safety systems are deactivated. This X Do not deactivate ESP® under any
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. circumstances.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
qualified specialist workshop. as necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the prevailing road and weather conditions.
ignition when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake dynamometer.
 Driving safety systems 75

ECO start/stop function X To activate:(Y page 241).

The ECO start/stop function switches the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
engine off automatically when the vehicle instrument cluster goes out.
stops moving. The engine starts
automatically when the driver wants to pull Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated

Safety
away again. ESP® remains in its previously If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
selected status. Example: if ESP® was start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
deactivated before the engine was switched the instrument cluster flashes. In such
off, ESP® remains deactivated when the situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
engine is switched on again. If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Deactivating/activating ESP
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
Important safety notes drive wheels are able to spin.
You can select between the following states The spinning of the wheels results in a
of ESP®: cutting action for better traction on loose
RESP® surfaces.
is activated.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
RESP® still provides support when you
G WARNING brake.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident. EBD (electronic brake force
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations distribution)
described in the following. General information
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the EBD monitors and controls the brake
following situations: pressure on the rear wheels to improve
Rwhen using snow chains driving stability while braking.
Rindeep snow
Important safety notes
Ron sand or gravel
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations section for driving safety systems
described above no longer apply. ESP® will (Y page 68).
otherwise not be able to stabilize the
vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a G WARNING
wheel starts to spin. If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
to the different handling characteristics. Have
Deactivating/activating ESP® the brake system checked at a qualified
X To deactivate:(Y page 241). specialist workshop.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.

Z
76 Driving safety systems

Observe information regarding indicator and Important safety notes

warning lamps (Y page 278) as well as
display messages (Y page 251). G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your
vehicle by a partial application of the brakes
ADAPTIVE BRAKE if a danger of collision is detected. There may
Safety

be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
after subsequent full application of the brakes
and offers increased braking comfort. In
a collision cannot always be avoided,
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
particularly when approaching at too high a
BRAKE also has the HOLD function
speed. There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 201) and hill start assist
(Y page 168). Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
PRE-SAFE® Brake
G WARNING
General information PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
i Observe the "Important safety notes" identify objects and complex traffic
section (Y page 68). conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available for
vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when
Rnot give a warning or intervene
driving, the radar sensor system and the
camera system must be switched on and be There is a risk of an accident.
operational. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
With the help of the radar sensor system and situation and be ready to brake, especially if
the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
detect obstacles that are in front of your intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
vehicle for an extended period of time.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
vehicle can be detected.
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body G WARNING
contours and posture of a person standing PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
upright. Rto small people, e.g. children
i Observe the restrictions described in the Rto animals
"Important safety notes" Rto oncoming vehicles
section“ (Y page 76). Rto crossing traffic
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize Rwhen cornering
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such
give warnings nor intervene in all critical
a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected situations. There is a risk of an accident.
a risk of collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically as well as by automatic Always pay careful attention to the traffic
braking. situation and be ready to brake.
 Driving safety systems 77

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the Function

recognition can be impaired.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or
Recognition by the radar sensor system is deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-
also impaired in the event of: board computer (Y page 241).
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the

Safety
covering the sensors æ symbol appears in the multifunction
Rinterference by other radar sources display.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph
example in parking garages (7 km/h), this function warns you if you
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
motorbike intermittent warning tone will then sound and
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line the · distance warning lamp will light up
relative to the center of your vehicle in the instrument cluster.
Recognition by the camera system is also X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
impaired in the event of: or
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
covered so.
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
from the sun being low in the sky automatically under the following conditions:
Rdarkness
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
Rif:
seat belts fastened
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the and
path of the vehicle Rthe vehicle speed is between
- the camera system no longer recognizes approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and
a pedestrian as a person due to special 124 mph (200 km/h)
clothing or other objects At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph
- a pedestrian is concealed by other
(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:
objects
Rstationary objects in the path of your
- the typical outline of a person is not
vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
distinguishable from the background
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation i If there is an increased risk of collision,
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified preventive passenger protection measures
specialist workshop. This also applies to (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.
collisions at low speeds where there is no If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Following damage to the windshield, have the action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
configuration and operation of the camera may perform automatic emergency braking,
system checked at a qualified specialist up to the point of full brake application.
workshop. Automatic emergency braking is not
performed until immediately prior to an
imminent accident.

Z
78 Theft deterrent locking system

You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
SAFE® Brake at any time by: the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

Ractivating kickdown. ignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Rreleasing the brake pedal.
Safety

The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ended automatically if: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Anyone can start the engine if a valid
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
i The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
front of your vehicle.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
STEER CONTROL charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
General information Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in
particular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a slippery road surface when you brake
heavily.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 68).
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive or KEYLESS-GO.
steering support from STEER CONTROL. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
Power steering will, however, continue to system is armed after approximately
function. 15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Theft deterrent locking system
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
Immobilizer alarm system is armed and you open:
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from Ra door
being started without the correct SmartKey. Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
 Theft deterrent locking system 79

X To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & button
on the SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or

Safety
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the
Customer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the
message or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace
service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.

Z
80
 81

Useful information .............................. 82

SmartKey ............................................. 82
Doors .................................................... 88
Trunk .................................................... 91
Side windows ...................................... 94
Soft top (Cabriolet) ............................. 99
Sliding sunroof (Coupe) .................... 110

Opening and closing

 82 SmartKey

Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
models and all standard and optional unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
equipment of your vehicle available at the could cause the engine to be switched off.
time of publication of the Operator's There is a risk of an accident.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
Opening and closing

not be equipped with all features before inserting the SmartKey into the
described. This also applies to safety- ignition lock.
related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
SmartKey vicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Important safety notes Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
G WARNING phone or another SmartKey
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
they could: foil
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
people or road users. This can affect the functionality of the
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they: SmartKey functions
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
: & To lock the vehicle
G WARNING ; F To unlock the trunk lid
If persons, particularly children are subjected = % To unlock the vehicle
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
X To unlock centrally: press the %
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the button.
vehicle.
 SmartKey 83

If you do not open the vehicle within A check which periodically establishes a radio
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: connection between the vehicle and the
Rthe vehicle is locked again. SmartKey determines whether a valid
Rthe
SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for
theft deterrent locking system is
example:
armed again.
Rwhen the external door handles are
X To lock centrally: press the & button. touched
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rwhen starting the engine

Opening and closing

Rthe doors Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap

The turn signals flash once when unlocking

and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 246).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 245). X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor
KEYLESS-GO
surface :.
General notes X Convenience closing feature: touch

Bear in mind that the engine can be started recessed sensor surface ; for an
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a extended period.
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 97).
Locking/unlocking centrally X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
the trunk lid.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a
conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle Changing the settings of the locking
by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock system
it using the & button on the SmartKey. You can change the settings of the locking
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, system. This means that only the driver's door
the distance between the SmartKey and the and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
corresponding door handle must not be vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
greater than 3 ft (1 m). frequently travel on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons on the
SmartKey simultaneously for

Z
 84 SmartKey

approximately six seconds until the battery There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
check lamp flashes twice (Y page 85). X To turn the alarm off with the
i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button
changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey.
vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or
Rlocks
or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Runlocks the vehicle or
Opening and closing

The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To disarm the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:
X To unlock the driver's door: press the press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
% button once. lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
or
button twice. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
vehicle.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as
follows: Removing the mechanical key
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface of the front-passenger door handle.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp : Release catch
flashes twice (Y page 85). ; Mechanical key
X Push release catch : in the direction of
Mechanical key the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
General notes
For further information about:
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 90)
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
Runlocking the trunk (Y page 93)
mechanical key.
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 90)
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
(Y page 78).
 SmartKey 85

SmartKey battery Replacing the battery

Important safety notes You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 84).
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.

Opening and closing

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
: Battery compartment cover
Checking the battery ; Mechanical key
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 85).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within = Battery
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button: X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
Rlocks or
X Insert the new battery with the positive
Runlocks the vehicle
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
i You can get a battery at any qualified cloth to do so.
specialist workshop.

Z
 86 SmartKey

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery
compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey (Y page 84).
Opening and closing

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons

on the vehicle.
 SmartKey 87

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it if
using the SmartKey. necessary (Y page 85).
If this does not work:

Opening and closing

X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it if
using KEYLESS-GO. necessary (Y page 85).
If this does not work:
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z
 88 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening and closing

If this does not work:

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 332).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 334).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.
Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, If persons, particularly children are subjected
they could: to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
people or road users. vehicle.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. You should preferably place luggage or loads
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in in the cargo compartment. Observe the
motion if, for example, they: loading guidelines (Y page 288).
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of Unlocking and opening doors from
park position P the inside
RStart the engine.
! The side windows will not open/close if
There is a risk of an accident and injury. the battery is discharged or if the side
When leaving the vehicle, always take the windows have iced up. It will then not be
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never possible to close the door. Do not attempt
leave children or animals unattended in the to force the door closed. You could
 Doors 89

otherwise damage the door or the side

window.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has
been locked with the SmartKey or with
KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).

Opening and closing

X To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
X To unlock a front door: pull door You can open a door from inside the vehicle
handle ;. even if it has been locked.
Locking knob : pops up.
If the vehicle has been locked using the
The door is unlocked and can be opened. locking button for the central locking, or has
X To open a front door: pull door been locked automatically, and a door is
handle ;. opened from the inside:
Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
previously been fully unlocked
knob :.
Ronly the door which has been opened form
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. door had been previously unlocked
i When a door is opened, the side window
on that side opens slightly. When the door Automatic locking feature
is closed, the side window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside.

Z
 90 Doors

X To deactivate: press and hold button : X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
for about five seconds until a tone sounds. to position 1.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for The door is unlocked.
about five seconds until a tone sounds. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
i If you press one of the two buttons and X Insert the mechanical key into the
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has SmartKey.
already been selected.
Opening and closing

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

The vehicle is locked automatically when the open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
ignition is switched on and the wheels are system will be triggered (Y page 78).
turning.
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
Rthe vehicle is being towed. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
You can also switch the automatic locking X Open the driver's door.
function on and off using the on-board X Close the front-passenger door and the
computer (Y page 245). trunk lid.
X Press the locking button (Y page 89).
X Check whether the locking knob on the
Unlocking the driver's door
(mechanical key) front-passenger door is still visible. If
necessary, press the locking knob down by
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with hand (Y page 88).
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. X Close the driver's door.
X Take the mechanical key out of the X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 84). SmartKey (Y page 84).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go. the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To unlock 1 To lock
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far
as it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
 Trunk 91

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid Trunk lid reversing feature
are locked.
The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
X Insert the mechanical key into the
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
SmartKey.
obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the
closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing
Trunk feature is only an aid and is not a substitute
for your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it

Opening and closing

Important safety notes
is closing.
G WARNING
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
The reversing feature does not react:
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, fingers
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is Rover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing
a risk of poisoning. movement
Always switch off the engine before opening This means that the reversing feature cannot
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid prevent someone being trapped in these
open. situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
G WARNING proximity during the closing procedure.
If persons, particularly children are subjected If somebody becomes trapped:
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the Rpress the remote operating switch on the
vehicle. driver's door, or
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
! The trunk lid swings upwards when trunk lid, or
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is Rpull on the trunk lid handle
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 390). Opening/closing from outside
You should preferably place luggage or loads Opening
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 288).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The trunk lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Rlocked separately
Ropened with the emergency release button
Runlocked with the mechanical key

Z
 92 Trunk

X Press the % button on the SmartKey. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
X Pull handle :. (Y page 390).
X Raise the trunk lid.
Opening
Closing You can unlock and open the trunk lid
simultaneously with the SmartKey.
X Press and hold the F button on the
Opening and closing

SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

Opening automatically from inside

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
the & button on the SmartKey especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
(Y page 82) or with KEYLESS-GO a risk of poisoning.
(Y page 83). Always switch off the engine before opening
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
will open again. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 390).
Opening automatically from outside
Opening
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. X To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
 Trunk 93

Locking the trunk separately

You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
X Close the trunk lid.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 84).

Opening and closing

1 Neutral position.
2 To unlock
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
from position 1 as far as it will go to
position 2. Pulling the trunk lid handle at
the same time.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 Basic position
1 and remove it.
2 To lock
X Insert the mechanical key into the
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid SmartKey.
lock as far as it will go.
i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90),
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
the trunk is also locked.
position 1 to position 2.
X Remove the mechanical key.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Trunk emergency release
SmartKey.
You can open the trunk lid from inside the
vehicle with the emergency release button.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered (Y page 78).
X Press emergency release button : briefly.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
SmartKey (Y page 84).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened
lock as far as it will go. with the trunk lid emergency release when
the vehicle is stationary or while driving.

Z
 94 Side windows

The trunk lid emergency release does not Side window reversing feature
open the trunk lid if the battery is
disconnected or discharged. The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
Trunk lid emergency release light:
blocks or restricts a side window during the
Remergency release button : flashes for closing process, the side window opens again
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. automatically. However, the automatic
Remergency release button : flashes for reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
Opening and closing

60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

attention when closing a side window.
G WARNING
Side windows
The reversing feature does not react:
Important safety notes Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
G WARNING
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
While opening the side windows, body parts
movement
could become trapped between the side
Rduring resetting
window and the door frame as the side
window moves. There is a risk of injury. Rwhen closing the side window again

Make sure that nobody touches the side manually immediately after automatic
window during the opening procedure. If reversing
somebody becomes trapped, release the This means that the reversing feature cannot
switch or pull the switch to close the side prevent someone being trapped in these
window again. situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
G WARNING proximity during the closing procedure. If
While opening the side windows, body parts someone becomes trapped, press the switch
in the closing area could become trapped. to open the side window again.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If Opening and closing the side
somebody becomes trapped, release the windows
switch or press the switch to open the side The switches for all side windows are located
window again. on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
the front-passenger door as well as on the
G WARNING doors in the rear compartment on the left and
If children operate the side windows they right-hand sides for the respective side
could become trapped, particularly if they are window.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. The switches on the driver's door take
Activate the override feature for the rear side precedence.
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
 Side windows 95

Make sure that no body parts are in close

proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch down to open the
side window again.

You can use the switch on the center console

to close all side windows simultaneously.

Opening and closing

X Open the cover in the lower center console.
The switch for all side windows is under the
: Front left
cover.
; Front right
= Rear right
? Rear left
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
i You can start automatic operation when
opening and closing the front door windows
and when opening the rear door windows. X To open all side windows: press
To do so, briefly press or pull the switch to switch : to the point of resistance.
beyond the point of resistance in the
X To open all side windows fully: press
relevant direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing or pulling again. switch : beyond the point of resistance.
X To close all side windows: pull
i You can continue to operate the side
switch :.
windows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the Using the SmartKey
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
G WARNING
i When the override feature for the side While opening the side windows, body parts
windows is activated (Y page 68), the side in the closing area could become trapped.
windows cannot be operated from the rear. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
Opening and closing all side windows somebody becomes trapped, release the
(Cabriolet) switch or press the switch to open the side
Using the switch on the center console window again.

G WARNING You can use the SmartKey to open or close

While opening the side windows, body parts all side windows simultaneously.
in the closing area could become trapped. X Close the soft top (Y page 100).
There is a risk of injury. X Open the trunk partition (Y page 106).

Z
 96 Side windows

X The key must be near the door handle.

X To open all side windows: press
the % button on the SmartKey until the
side windows are fully opened.
X To interrupt the opening procedure:
release the % button.
X To close all side windows: press the
& button on the SmartKey until the side
Opening and closing

windows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure:
release the & button. XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed
G WARNING sensor surface :.
When using the convenience closing feature,
X Make sure that all the side windows are
parts of the body could be trapped in the
closed.
closing area when a side window is being
X To interrupt convenience closing:
closed. There is a risk of injury.
release recessed sensor surface : on the
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is door handle.
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing
procedure. Convenience opening (Coupe)

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: General notes

X release the sensor surface on the door You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
handle. driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
X pull the door handle immediately and hold
carry out the following functions
it. simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
The side windows open.
Ropen the side windows
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO
key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors sliding panel and the roller sunblind
must be closed. Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the
driver's seat
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
key must be in close proximity to the
vehicle.

Convenience opening
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
 Side windows 97

power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired General notes

position.
When you lock the vehicle, you can
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
simultaneously:
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first. Rclose the side windows
X Press and hold the % button again until Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding sliding panel
panel is in the desired position. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power

Opening and closing

X To interrupt convenience opening: tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
release the % button. roller sunblind.

Using the SmartKey

Convenience closing (Coupe) X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on
Important safety notes
the driver's door.
Information on the side window reversing X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must
feature (Y page 94). be in close proximity to the vehicle.
G WARNING X Press and hold the & button until the

When the convenience closing feature is side windows and the panorama roof with
operating, parts of the body could become power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
trapped in the closing area of the side window X Make sure that all the side windows and the
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
injury. panel are closed.
Observe the complete closing procedure On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
when the convenience closing feature is tilt/sliding panel:
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing
X Press and hold the & button again until
procedure. the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel closes.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: X To interrupt convenience closing:
With the SmartKey: release the & button.
X Release the & button.
X Press and hold the % button until the Using KEYLESS-GO
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
panel open again.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
X Release the sensor surface on the door
handle.
X Pull the door handle immediately and hold
it.
The side windows and the sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel open.

Z
 98 Side windows

If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 94).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
Opening and closing

If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind
of the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel closes.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 94).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 99

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

Opening and closing

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Soft top (Cabriolet) ! When opening and closing the soft top,
make sure that:
Important safety notes
Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, as
G WARNING the soft top swings upwards.
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the Rthe trunk partition is closed.
soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the
time. This causes the soft top to lower trunk partition.
unexpectedly and may cause you or others to Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by
be trapped. There is a risk of injury. the load.
Always open or close the soft top completely. Rthe trunk lid is closed.
Rthere are no objects on the soft-top
! Never sit on the soft-top compartment
cover or stow heavy objects there. You will compartment cover
otherwise damage the soft top and soft-top Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen.

compartment cover of the vehicle. You could otherwise damage the soft top,
trunk and other parts of the vehicle.

Z
100 Soft top (Cabriolet)

i Vehicle height when opening/closing the your view to the rear. There is a risk of an
soft top (Y page 390). accident.
i Make sure that the soft top is dry and Reduce your speed to below 25 mph
clean before closing it. Otherwise, water or (40 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance
dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk. with the traffic conditions. Press or pull the
soft-top switch again in order to open or close
You can open or close the soft top:
the soft top fully.
Rwhen the vehicle is stationary or
Opening and closing

Rwhen you do not exceed a speed of Opening and closing

25 mph (40 km/h).
X Make sure that the trunk partition is closed
If there is a strong head wind, it may not be
(Y page 106).
possible to close the soft top fully. In this
X Close the trunk lid.
case, reduce speed or stop in order to close
the soft top fully. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz ignition lock.

recommends that you only open or close the X Open the cover in the lower center console.
soft top when the vehicle is stationary.
If the soft top does not open or close fully, the
soft-top hydraulics are depressurized and the
soft top is lowered:
Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the
ignition is switched on
Rimmediately if the ignition is switched off

Opening and closing with the soft top

switch
X To open: pull soft-top switch : until the
Important safety notes entire soft top is stowed away in the trunk.
G WARNING The Convertible Top in Operation
message appears in the multifunction
When opening or closing the soft top, there is
display.
a risk that parts of the body could become
trapped by moving parts such as the roof If, when opening, you drive at speeds above
mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side 25 (40 km/h), the opening procedure is
windows. There is a risk of injury. stopped. The Open/Close Convertible
Top Completely message appears in the
When opening or closing the roof, make sure
multifunction display. In order to open the
that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of
soft top fully, reduce your speed again to
moving parts. Release the switch if somebody
below 25 (40 km/h) and pull the soft-top
becomes trapped.
switch again.
X To close: press and hold soft-top
G WARNING
switch : until the soft top is fully closed.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the soft top stops during the
The Convertible Top in Operation
opening or closing procedure. This impairs
message appears in the multifunction
display.
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 101

If, when closing, you drive at speeds above Closing the soft top manually
25 mph (40 km/h), the opening procedure
is stopped. The Open/Close Important safety notes
Convertible Top Completely message
G WARNING
appears in the multifunction display. In
order to close the soft top fully, reduce your Closing the soft top manually is a complex,
speed again to below 25 mph (40 km/h) technically challenging procedure which can
and press the soft-top switch again. also be physically demanding. You or others
can become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Opening and closing

Where possible, have the soft top closed
Opening and closing using the manually at a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
If the soft top cannot be closed automatically,
Important safety notes check the following points:
Ris the trunk partition engaged
G WARNING
(Y page 106)?
When opening or closing the soft top, there is Rare the head restraints on the rear bench
a risk that parts of the body could become
seats extended?
trapped by moving parts such as the roof
Ris the trunk lid closed?
mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side
windows. There is a risk of injury. Ris the on-board voltage sufficient?

When opening or closing the roof, make sure Start the engine if necessary.
that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of If automatic operation still does not work, the
moving parts. Release the switch if somebody soft top can be closed manually.
becomes trapped. To carry out this work, you will need the
assistance of another person.
Opening and closing
Closing the soft top
The SmartKey must be near the door handle.
X To open: press and hold the % button X Apply the parking brake.
on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully X Open the side windows.
opened. X Lower the head restraints automatically
The Convertible Top in Operation (Y page 119) or manually (Y page 119).
message appears in the multifunction X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
display. The seat ventilation is switched on. lock.
The rear side windows open. X Open the trunk.
X To close: press and hold the & button
X Take the two straps out of the vehicle tool
on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully kit (Y page 328).
closed.
X Take the hex-socket wrench out of the
The Convertible Top in Operation
Operator's Manual wallet and keep it with
message appears in the multifunction
you.
display. The soft top and the side windows
close.

Z
102
Opening and closing Soft top (Cabriolet)

X Turn rotary catch : counter-clockwise X Pull out catch B on both sides as far as it
and fold down cover ;. will go and turn it approximately a quarter
of a turn counter-clockwise.
X Make sure catch B is not drawn in again.
If this happens, pull out catch B again as
far as possible and turn it about a quarter
turn counter-clockwise.

X Insert Allen key = into valve screw ? on

the hydraulic pump.
X Turn valve screw ? of the hydraulic pump
with Allen key = counter-clockwise a full
turn.
The soft-top compartment hinges are on the
right-hand and left-hand side in the gap
between the lid of the soft-top compartment
and the trunk seal.
X Shift both levers D of soft-top
compartment hinges C forwards beyond
the detent position on both sides.

X On both sides of the trunk, tear paneling

A along the perforation in the direction of
the arrow.
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 103

can only access the trunk again once you

have fully closed the soft top manually.
X Close the trunk lid.
! The trunk lid must be closed for the next
steps. The soft top compartment cover
could otherwise collide with the trunk lid.

Opening and closing

X On both sides, pull the straps through
behind the soft-top compartment hinges in
the direction of the arrow.
X Route the straps through the created loops.

X Each person takes a strap.

X Pulling with force, simultaneously lift out
the cover of the soft-top compartment
back/up by the straps in the direction of
the arrow.

G WARNING
If anywhere other than the indicated gripping
XPull the straps between the soft-top points is gripped, you or others can become
compartment hinges and the soft-top trapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury.
compartment. Take off jewelery and watches. Only hold the
i Do not pull the straps as long as the trunk indicated gripping points. Do not reach
is open. between the cover halves and into the hinges.

XPlace straps E on the soft-top

compartment lid.
i Take the hex-socket wrench and the
SmartKey out of the trunk if necessary. You

Z
104 Soft top (Cabriolet)

X One person stands on the right-hand side direction of the arrow onto windshield
and the other person on the left-hand side frame H.
of the vehicle.
X Grip the soft-top compartment with one
hand as illustrated.
X Use the other hand to support yourself on
the edge of the trunk lid as illustrated.
X Lift soft-top compartment lid F up as far
Opening and closing

as it will go. In doing so, pull soft-top

compartment lid F to the rear, applying
constant force.

G WARNING
If anywhere other than the indicated gripping I To open
points is gripped, you or others can become J To lock
trapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury. X Pull off the cover of the roof lock behind the
Take off jewelery and watches. Only hold the overhead control panel.
indicated gripping points. Do not reach X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock.
between the cover halves and into the hinges.
X Turn the Allen key clockwise I as far as
possible.
! During the following step, make sure that
the Allen key is turned counter-clockwise
as far as it will go. Otherwise, the soft top
may not be properly locked.
X Turn the Allen key counter-clockwise J as
far as possible.
The soft top is now pre-locked on the
windshield frame.

X Reach under the tip of soft top G in the

soft-top compartment from the right-hand
and left-hand sides.

X Move material tensioning frame K to an

upright position.
! Make sure the soft-top compartment
X Lift the soft top out of the soft-top cover does not collide with the material
compartment and guide it forwards in the tensioning frame during the following step.
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 105

X Lower soft-top compartment lid L. X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock.
X Turn the Allen key counter-clockwise N as
far as possible.
X Have the soft-top mechanism repaired
immediately at a specialist workshop.
i Press the soft-top compartment lid again
if the trunk lid cannot be opened.

Opening and closing

! Do not under any circumstances open the
trunk lid with the emergency key. You could
otherwise damage the trunk lid and the
soft-top compartment cover.

Relocking the soft top

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the
soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short
time. This causes the soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others to
be trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X With your hand flat, press down the Always open or close the soft top completely.
material tensioning frame until it rests on
soft-top support M of the soft-top The soft top is not locked if:
compartment lid. Rthe Convertible Top in Operation
X With your hand flat, press the soft-top
message appears in the multifunction
compartment cover forwards/downwards display.
on both sides simultaneously until it Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten
engages in the guide. Apply your hands to
seconds when pulling away or while driving.
the points indicated with arrows.
At the same time, press the material
tensioning frame gently downwards with
To lock
your flat hand. You can lock the soft top again if it is not
locked fully.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press the soft-top switch (Y page 100).

Z
106 Soft top (Cabriolet)

Trunk partition Brackets for the wind screen

General notes G WARNING
! To avoid damaging the soft top or load If you use the wind screen in darkness or in
when folding back the soft top, observe the other conditions offering poor visibility, your
following: view to the rear is further impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Rwhen the trunk partition is open, do not Only use the wind screen when visibility
place any objects in or behind the net on
Opening and closing

conditions are good.

the side that are so long they could
obstruct the trunk partition or damage ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
the opened soft top. only use wind screens which have been
Rmake sure that the cargo does not push tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz
the trunk partition upwards. vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to
The soft top can only be opened when the the vehicle.
trunk partition is closed. ! Observe the backrest position of the front
The trunk partition can be used to cover seats if the wind screen is installed, since
luggage and loads in the trunk. the backrest could collide with the wind
screen here.
Opening and closing

The wind screen protects against wind when

X To close: pull trunk partition : by the driving with the soft top open. It is secured
handle in the direction of the arrow until it above the rear bench seats. For this reason,
rests on the sides of the trunk. only the driver and the front passenger can
Trunk partition : finishes closing travel in the vehicle when the wind screen is
automatically. installed.
X To open: push trunk partition : against X When installing the wind screen, use lateral

the direction of the arrow by the handle. brackets :.

The trunk partition finishes opening Observe the manufacturer's installation
automatically. instructions.
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 107

AIRCAP Activating AIRCAP

Important safety notes

G WARNING
When retracting the AIRCAP, persons could
become caught in the moving mechanism.
There is a risk of injury.

Opening and closing

Ensure that persons do not hold onto the
upper frame of the windshield and do not
touch the AIRCAP wind deflector.

G WARNING
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
When retracting the AIRCAP, persons could
ignition lock.
become caught in the moving mechanism.
X Open the cover in the lower center console.
There is a risk of injury.
X Press AIRCAP button :.
Ensure that persons do not hold onto the
upper frame of the windshield and do not The AIRCAP wind screen between the rear-
touch the AIRCAP wind deflector. seat head restraints extends upwards. The
indicator lamp in the AIRCAP button lights
With AIRCAP, four people can travel up.
comfortably with the soft top open. AIRCAP If the speed-dependent AIRCAP wind
reduces the draft for the driver and deflector also extends, a second indicator
passengers in both the front and the rear lamp lights up.
compartment in a vehicle with the soft top
down.
AIRCAP has the following components:
Ra speed-dependent wind deflector above
the windshield
Ran AIRCAP wind screen between the two
head restraints on the rear bench seat
When AIRCAP has been activated, the
AIRCAP wind screen between the two rear
seat head restraints extends upwards. At a
speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
higher, the wind deflector on the windshield The head restraints on the rear bench seats
also extends. If you drive at speeds below and AIRCAP wind screen ; move to the
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the wind center position.
deflector retracts automatically. When a seat belt in the rear compartment is
AIRCAP can be activated or deactivated up to fastened, the head restraints on the rear
speeds of approximately 100 mph bench seats move to the upper position.
(160 km/h). AIRCAP wind screen ; moves to the upper
position.

Z
108 Soft top (Cabriolet)

individually (Y page 119). The wind deflector

remains in its current position.

Installing and removing the AIRCAP

wind screen
Preparation
Opening and closing

You will need a 4 mm Allen key to install/

remove the AIRCAP wind screen.
Before installing or removing the AIRCAP
Wind deflector = extends depending on
wind screen:
vehicle speed.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
i If you park your vehicle with the roof open ignition lock.
and remove the SmartKey, the AIRCAP X Open the folding roof fully (Y page 100).
wind screen retracts automatically. If, after
X Extend the head restraints in the rear
parking the vehicle, the engine is restarted,
the AIRCAP system is activated compartment fully (Y page 119).
automatically.
Removing
i AIRCAP cannot be extended or retracted
if the vehicle speed exceeds approximately
100 mph (160 km/h).

Deactivating AIRCAP
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Open the cover in the lower center console.
X Press AIRCAP button :.

The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP

button go out. The wind deflector = retracts. Bolts on the AIRCAP wind screen between the head
The head restraints on the rear seats and restraints in the rear compartment
AIRCAP wind screen ; move to the lowest X Use the 4 mm hex-socket wrench to turn
position simultaneously. the bolts on both sides counter-clockwise
by about 90° and loosen them.
i If there are passengers wearing seat belts
X Pull the bolts out of the brackets on the
in the rear compartment, the head
restraints on the rear bench seats and the head restraints.
AIRCAP wind screen remain in the upper
position.

Retracting the head restraints on the

rear bench seats from the driver's seat
To improve the rear view, you can retract the
head restraints on the rear bench seats
 Soft top (Cabriolet) 109

Opening and closing

X Pull the AIRCAP wind screen out of the
guide rails in the direction of the arrow.
Make sure that you pull the AIRCAP wind
screen forwards slightly when doing so.

Installing

X Keeping the AIRCAP wind screen

horizontal, guide it into the slot between
the head restraints in the direction of the
arrow with both racks straight down.
X Push the AIRCAP wind screen down until
the bolts are at the same height as the
brackets on the head restraints.
X Insert the bolts into the brackets on both
sides.
X Tighten the bolts with the 4 mm Allen key
until they engage.
The markings on the bolts are vertical.

Z
110 Sliding sunroof (Coupe)

Problems with the soft top

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The soft top will not The ignition is not switched on.
open or close. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

The trunk lid is open.

Opening and closing

X Close the trunk lid (Y page 106).

The trunk partition is not closed.

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 106).

The roll bars have been deployed.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The head restraints in the rear compartment do not retract

automatically.
X Lower the head restraints in the rear compartment manually,
see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Head restraint".

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.

X Close the soft top manually if necessary (Y page 101).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.
The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety
reasons.
You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

Sliding sunroof (Coupe) Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing
Important safety notes procedures.
In the following section, the term "sliding If somebody becomes trapped:
sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with Rrelease the switch immediately, or
power tilt/sliding panel.
Rduring automatic operation, push the
G WARNING switch briefly in any direction
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, The opening or closing procedure will be
body parts in close proximity could become stopped.
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
 Sliding sunroof (Coupe) 111

G WARNING G WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they The reversing feature does not react:
could become trapped, particularly if they are Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. fingers
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never movement
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rduring resetting

Opening and closing

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions manually immediately after automatic
may occur. reversing
Do not allow anything to protrude from the This means that the reversing feature cannot
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could prevent someone being trapped in these
be damaged. situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
proximity during the closing procedure.
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the If somebody becomes trapped:
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be Rrelease the switch immediately, or
damaged if water enters the vehicle Rduring automatic operation, push the
interior. switch briefly in any direction
i Resonance noises can occur in addition The closing process is stopped.
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Operating the panorama roof with
Change the position of the sliding sunroof power tilt/sliding panel
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.

Reversing feature for the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panel
In the following section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during Overhead control panel
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens : To raise
again automatically. However, the automatic ; To open
reversing feature is only an aid and does not = To close/lower
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the sliding sunroof. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel can only be operated when the roller
sunblind is open.

Z
112 Sliding sunroof (Coupe)

X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to for your attentiveness to the roller sunblind
position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. while it is closing.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
G WARNING
corresponding direction.
The reversing feature especially does not
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the react to soft, light and thin objects such as
point of resistance, an automatic opening/ small fingers. This means that the reversing
closing process is started in the feature cannot prevent someone being
corresponding direction. You can stop trapped in these situations. There is a risk of
Opening and closing

automatic operation by operating the injury.

switch again. When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Operating the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Rrelease the switch immediately, or
panel Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
Important safety notes
The closing process is stopped.
G WARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind, Opening and closing
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be Overhead control panel
stopped. : Opening

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior ; Opening

from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be = Closing
opened and closed when the panorama roof X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
Roller sunblind reversing feature
corresponding direction.
The roller sunblind is equipped with an i If you press or pull the 3 switch
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object beyond the point of resistance, an
blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during automatic opening/closing process is
the closing process, the roller sunblind opens started in the corresponding direction. You
again automatically. The automatic reversing can stop automatic operation by pressing
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute or pulling again.
 Sliding sunroof (Coupe) 113

Resetting the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel and roller
sunblind
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot
be fully opened or closed after resetting,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Opening and closing

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and the roller sunblind if the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
or the roller sunblind does not move
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel is fully closed (Y page 112).
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 111) and
the roller sunblind (Y page 112) can be fully
opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.

Z
114 Sliding sunroof (Coupe)

Problems with the sliding sunroof

In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Opening and closing

injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
cannot be closed and again slightly:
you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment
feature.
 115

Useful information ............................ 116

Correct driver's seat position .......... 116
Seats .................................................. 117
Steering wheel .................................. 124
Mirrors ............................................... 127
Memory function .............................. 130

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

116 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 117).
i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted
models and all standard and optional properly.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 118)
time of publication of the Operator's When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Manual. Country-specific differences are
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features as possible.
described. This also applies to safety- Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
related systems and functions.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

i Read the information on qualified Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is
G WARNING adjusted properly.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you When doing so, make sure that you have
do the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by
steering wheel or mirrors the center of the head restraint.
Rfasten the seat belt X Observe the safety guidelines on steering

There is a risk of an accident. wheel adjustment (Y page 124).

X Make sure that steering wheel : is
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your adjusted properly.
seat belt before starting the engine. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 125)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 57).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 59).
 Seats 117

The seat belt should: adjustment buttons and become trapped.

Rfit snugly across your body There is a risk of injury.
Rbe routed across the middle of your While moving the seats, make sure that your
shoulder hands or other body parts do not get under
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
joints system.
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
G WARNING
mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a
way that you have a good view of road and When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
traffic conditions (Y page 127). occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
settings with the memory function has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
(Y page 130).
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
Seats adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
Important safety notes risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
G WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
Children could become trapped if they adjust installed. Before driving off, make sure for
the seats, particularly when unattended. every vehicle occupant that the center of the
There is a risk of injury. head restraint supports the back of the head
When leaving the vehicle, always take the at about eye level.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
G WARNING of protection if you have not moved the
You could lose control of your vehicle if you backrest to an almost vertical position. When
do the following while driving: braking or in the event of an accident, you
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, could slide underneath the seat belt and
steering wheel or mirrors sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for
Rfasten the seat belt example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
is in an almost vertical position and that the
seat belt before starting the engine.
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat

Z
118 Seats

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat Adjusting the seats
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

see "Interior care".

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
: Head restraint height
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
; Seat cushion angle
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by = Seat height
passengers, if possible. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do A Backrest angle
not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
seat covers, child seats or booster seats. passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an
! Make sure that there are no objects in the unfavorable position.
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats i You can store the seat settings using the
and/or the objects could be damaged. memory function (Y page 130).

i The head restraints in the front seats are i Vehicles with the through-loading
installed with the NECK-PRO system feature: if you fold down a rear seat
(Y page 55). For this reason, it is not backrest, the respective front seat is
possible to remove the head restraints moved forwards slightly if necessary. This
from the front seats. prevents the seats from colliding.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
 Seats 119

G WARNING Rear seat head restraints

If head restraints are not installed and
Lowering and extending the rear seat
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
head restraints from the front (Cabriolet)
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

at about eye level.

General notes
Observe the important safety notes regarding
the seats (Y page 117). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front ignition lock (Y page 165).
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust X To lower: press button :.

the height and angle of the head restraints to The head restraints move to the lowest
the correct position. position.
If AIRCAP is activated, the right-hand
Adjusting the height of the head indicator lamp on the AIRCAP button goes
restraints electrically out.
X To extend: press button : again.

The head restraints only move into the

central position if AIRCAP is activated and
no rear seat belt has been fastened.
If AIRCAP is activated, the right-hand
indicator lamp on the AIRCAP button
comes on.
i Please see further information on AIRCAP
(Y page 107).

X To adjust the head restraint height: slide

switch for head restraint adjustment : up Lowering the head restraints in the
or down in the direction of the arrow. rear compartment manually
(Cabriolet)
If the head restraints in the rear compartment
are in the upper position, the soft top cannot
be closed fully.

Z
120 Seats

Lower the head restraints in the rear Folding the front seat backrests
compartment manually if: forward/back
Rthe head restraint electronics are
Important safety notes
malfunctioning.
Rthe opening or closing procedure of the soft G WARNING
top is interrupted, leaving the soft top If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold
compartment cover open. forwards during a braking maneuver or in the
event of an accident, for example. The seat
backrest will then push the vehicle occupant
against the seat belt. The seat belt can no
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

longer offer the intended level of protection

and could even cause injuries. There is an
increased risk of injury.
Before each journey, make sure that the
backrest engages fully as described.

G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
Cover ; can only be released if: do the following while driving:
Rthe soft top is interrupted during the Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
opening or closing procedure. mirrors
Rthe soft top compartment cover is left Rfasten the seat belt
open. There is a risk of an accident.
X Push the mechanical key into two
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
openings : between the head restraints mirrors and fasten your seat belt before
until cover ; releases. starting the engine.
X Take off cover ;.
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

X Lowering the head restraints: turn

thumbwheel : in the direction of the front
seats.
 Seats 121

Folding the seat backrest forward Adjusting the multicontour seat

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Example: Coupe : To adjust the thigh cushion
The seat moves forwards if you have folded ; To adjust the backrest contour in the
the backrest forwards and the seat is in the lumbar region
rear half of the range. This makes it easier for = To adjust the backrest contour in the
passengers to get into and out of the rear upper back region
compartment. The head restraint is lowered ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
simultaneously. backrest
X Pull seat release handle : forwards and
You can adjust the contour of the front seats
fold the backrest forwards as far as it will individually so as to provide optimum support
go. for your back and sides.
The seat automatically moves to the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
foremost position and the head restraint is
lowered. ignition lock (Y page 165).

Folding the seat backrest back

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X Swing back the seat backrest.
The seat moves automatically to the stored
position.

: To raise the backrest contour

; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
Z
122 Seats

Switching the seat heating on/off i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk

of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
 Seats 123

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Cabriolet: you can open the soft top and the
rear side windows with the SmartKey
Activating/deactivating (Y page 101). The seat ventilation of the
driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i Coupe: you can open the side windows
and the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 96). The seat
ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.

Z
124 Steering wheel

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

AIRSCARF (Cabriolet) X Press button : repeatedly until the

desired heating level is set.
G WARNING X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air until all the indicator lamps go out.
can flow from the vents in the head restraints.
This could result in burns in the immediate You can use the adjustable fins on the head
vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. restraint to adjust the height of the current of
air blown out according to your height.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot. Make sure that there are no objects covering
the intake grille on the back of the driver's
seat backrest.
i The blower continues running for seven
seconds to cool down the heating
elements.
i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF
may switch off.

Steering wheel

Driver's and front-passenger seat Important safety notes

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and G WARNING
neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. You could lose control of your vehicle if you
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head do the following while driving:
restraints.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
The three red indicator lamps in the button
steering wheel or mirrors
indicate the heating level you have selected.
Rfasten the seat belt
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
There is a risk of an accident.
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button :.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
seat belt before starting the engine.
up. The blower starts up after a preheating
phase of seven seconds.
 Steering wheel 125

G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

Children could injure themselves if they ignition lock (Y page 165).
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
injury. direction of arrow : or ;.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
Adjusting the steering wheel off the ignition and open the driver's door, the

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior is
above 86 ‡ (30 †).
Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95 ‡ (35 †).
Indicator lamp = remains on.

: To adjust the steering wheel height

; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 126)
RStoring settings (Y page 130)

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

Z
126 Steering wheel

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
heating has switched consumers are switched on.
off prematurely or X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
cannot be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel
heating will switch back on automatically.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.
Important safety notes
Always wait until the adjustment process is
G WARNING complete before driving off.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
in and out of your vehicle easier.
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
computer (Y page 246).
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
The steering wheel swings upwards when
one of the memory function position
you:
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

adjustment in the opposite direction to that Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
in which the steering wheel is moving. KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
The adjustment process is stopped. Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's
door; the SmartKey must be in position 0
G WARNING or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 165)
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
feature, they can become trapped, it has not already reached the upper end
particularly when unattended. There is a risk stop.
of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
 Mirrors 127

Position of the steering wheel for Mirrors

driving
Rear-view mirror
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when:
Rthe driver's door is closed
Rwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/
Stop button once on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO
or

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Rwith the SmartKey: you insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
set position. forwards or back.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory Exterior mirrors
function (Y page 130). Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
do the following while driving:
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
opened. This occurs irrespective of the steering wheel or mirrors
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Rfasten the seat belt
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and There is a risk of an accident.
rescue the occupants.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY seat belt before starting the engine.
feature is activated in the on-board computer.
(Y page 246) G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
distance from road users traveling behind,
e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Z
128 Mirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 165).
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
mirror or button ; for the right-hand ignition lock (Y page 165).
exterior mirror. X Briefly press button :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
button lights up in red.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
The indicator lamp goes out again after
always folded out fully while driving. They
some time. You can adjust the selected
could otherwise vibrate.
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit. i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
to the left or right until you have adjusted exterior mirrors.
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic Setting the exterior mirrors
conditions. If the battery has been disconnected or
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
field of vision. must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
After the engine has been started, the otherwise not fold in when you select the
exterior mirrors are automatically heated if "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
the rear window defroster is switched on and on-board computer. (Y page 246)
the outside temperature is low. Heating takes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
a maximum of 10 minutes. ignition lock (Y page 165).
X Briefly press button :.
i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 246):
 Mirrors 129

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as Parking position for the exterior
soon as you lock the vehicle from the mirror on the front-passenger side
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again Setting and storing the parking position
automatically as soon as you unlock the Using reverse gear
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually. : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
X Vehicles with electrically folding ; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror- exterior mirror
folding button : until you hear a click and = Adjustment button
then the mirrors engage in position ? Memory button M
(Y page 128).
The mirror housing is engaged again and You can position the front-passenger side
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
(Y page 127). the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors X Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror (Y page 165).
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously: the front-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.
Rthe ignition is switched on and
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the side moves to the preset parking position.
sensor in the rear-view mirror. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if exterior mirror to a position that allows you
reverse gear is engaged. to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving
position.

Z
130 Memory function

Using the memory button Calling up a stored parking position

setting
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

; Button for the front-passenger side : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
exterior mirror ; Button for the front-passenger side
= Adjustment button exterior mirror
? Memory button M = Adjustment button
You can position the front-passenger side ? Memory button M
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you ignition lock (Y page 165).
engage reverse gear. This setting can be X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
stored using memory button M ?. passenger side using button ;.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Engage reverse gear.
ignition lock (Y page 165). The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X With the exterior mirror on the front- side moves to the stored parking position.
passenger side activated, use adjustment The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In side moves back to its original position:
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
curb should be visible.
(15 km/h)
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
Rif you press button : for the exterior
arrows on adjustment button = within
mirror on the driver's side
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move. Memory function
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
these steps. Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
 Memory function 131

G WARNING steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in

Children could become trapped if they the stored position.
activate the memory function, particularly i The setting procedure is interrupted as
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. soon as you release the storage position
When leaving the vehicle, always take the button.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings, e.g. for three

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 118).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 125) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 127).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat,

Z
132
 133

Useful information ............................ 134

Exterior lighting ................................ 134
Interior lighting ................................. 141
Replacing bulbs ................................. 142
Windshield wipers ............................ 143

Lights and windshield wipers

134 Exterior lighting

Useful information Asymmetrical low beam

Have the headlamps converted back to
i This Operator's Manual describes all asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
models and all standard and optional qualified specialist workshop as soon as
equipment of your vehicle available at the possible after crossing the border again.
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Setting the exterior lighting
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety- Setting options
related systems and functions.
Exterior lighting can be set using:
i Read the information on qualified Rthe light switch
specialist workshops: (Y page 25).
Lights and windshield wipers

Rthe combination switch (Y page 137)

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 244)

Exterior lighting
Light switch
General notes
Operation
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime.
Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with
special daytime running lamps. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(Y page 244). 1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
Driving abroad 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low controlled by the light sensor
beam in countries in which traffic drives on 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
the opposite side of the road from the country BR Rear fog lamp
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents
glare to oncoming traffic. When using If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as
possible before driving in these countries.
 Exterior lighting 135

The exterior lighting (except the parking/ Ã is the favored light switch setting. The
standing lamps) switches off automatically if light setting is automatically selected
you: according to the brightness of the ambient
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
Ropen
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0. RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
Automatic headlamp mode automatically depending on the brightness
G WARNING of the ambient light.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- RWith the engine running: if you have

beam headlamps may not be switched on activated the daytime running lamps
automatically if there is fog, snow or other function via the on-board computer, the
causes of poor visibility due to the weather daytime running lamps or the low-beam

Lights and windshield wipers

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an headlamps and parking lamps are switched
accident. on or off automatically depending on the
In such situations, turn the light switch to brightness of the ambient light.
L. X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an Only for Canada:
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
The daytime running lamps improve the
lighting at all times.
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you
1W Left-hand standing lamps turn the light switch to T, the daytime
2X Right-hand standing lamps running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
3T Parking lamps, license plate and If the engine is running and you turn the light
instrument cluster lighting switch to L, the manual settings take
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
controlled by the light sensor USA only:
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The daytime running lamps improve the
BR Rear fog lamp
visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
this, the daytime running lamps function must
be switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 244).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings

Z
136 Exterior lighting

take precedence over the daytime running Rear fog lamp

lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L. 1W Left-hand standing lamps
Lights and windshield wipers

2X Right-hand standing lamps

3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
BR Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
1W Left-hand standing lamps
lamps.
2X Right-hand standing lamps
X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
3T Parking lamps, license plate and SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
instrument cluster lighting or start the engine.
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
controlled by the light sensor
X Press the R button.
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
BR Rear fog lamp instrument cluster lights up.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam R button.
headlamps switch on when the ignition is The yellow R indicator lamp in the
switched on and the light switch is set to the instrument cluster goes out.
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog. Parking lamps
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: ! If the battery has been excessively
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to discharged, the parking lamps or standing
position 2 or start the engine. lamps are automatically switched off to
X Turn the light switch to L. enable the next engine start. Always park
The green L indicator lamp in the your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
instrument cluster lights up. according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
 Exterior lighting 137

for several hours. If possible, switch on the 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

X right or the W left standing lamp. BR Rear fog lamp
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).

Lights and windshield wipers

1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps Combination switch
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting Turn signal
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
BR Rear fog lamp
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
T.
The green T indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
1W Left-hand standing lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction
2X Right-hand standing lamps of arrow ; or ?.
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor

Z
138 Exterior lighting

High-beam headlamps High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps : High-beam headlamps

Lights and windshield wipers

; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right

= High-beam flasher = High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
position 2 or start the engine. engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Pull the combination switch in the direction
X Press the combination switch beyond the of arrow =.
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam Hazard warning lamps
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the high-
beam headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
it controls activation of the high-beam press button :.
headlamps (Y page 139). All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
 Exterior lighting 139

The hazard warning lamps automatically The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
switch on if: time, but is automatically switched off after
Ran air bag is deployed no more than three minutes.
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
Active light function
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off
automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.

Lights and windshield wipers

Cornering light function

The active light function is a system that

moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
while driving. This allows you to identify
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

The cornering light function improves the
illumination of the road over a wide angle in Important safety notes
the direction you are turning, enabling better G WARNING
visibility in tight bends, for example. It can
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
only be activated when the low-beam
road users:
headlamps are switched on.
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Active:
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Rif you are driving at speeds between may fail to recognize other road users that
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) have lights, or may recognize them too late.
and turn the steering wheel In this or similar situations, the automatic
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn
accident.
signal or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.

Z
140 Exterior lighting

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into The system's optical sensor is located behind
account road, weather or traffic conditions. the windshield near the overhead control
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You panel.
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
traffic conditions. on/off
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirton the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Lights and windshield wipers

General notes

: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up when it is
dark and the light sensor activates the low-
beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):
You can use this function to set the The headlamp range is set automatically
headlamps to change between low beam and depending on the distance between the
high beam automatically. The system vehicle and other road users.
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either If you are driving at speeds above
approaching from the opposite direction or approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no
traveling in front of your vehicle, and other road users have been detected:
consequently switches the headlamps from
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
high beam to low beam.
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
The system automatically adapts the low- the instrument cluster also lights up.
beam headlamp range depending on the
If you are driving at speeds below
distance to the other vehicle. Once the
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other
system no longer detects any other vehicles,
road users have been detected or the roads
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
are adequately lit:
 Interior lighting 141

The high-beam headlamps are switched off = p To switch the right-hand reading
automatically. The K indicator lamp in lamp on/off
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ ? c To switch the front interior lighting
indicator lamp in the multifunction display on/off
remains lit. A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
X To switch off: move the combination
on/off
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument Interior lighting control
cluster goes out.
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
Headlamps fogged up on the inside discharging, the interior lighting functions are

Lights and windshield wipers

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if automatically deactivated after some time
there is high atmospheric humidity. unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Switch on the light and drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes,
Automatic interior lighting control
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off (Coupe only)
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
Overhead control panel (example: Coupe) on/off
: u To switch the rear interior lighting X To activate/deactivate: press the |
on/off (Coupe only) button.
; | To switch the automatic interior When the automatic interior lighting
lighting control on/off control is activated, the button is flush with
the overhead control panel.

Z
142 Replacing bulbs

The interior lighting automatically switches Crash-responsive emergency lighting

on if you:
The interior lighting is activated automatically
Runlock the vehicle if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Ropen a door
X To switch off the crash-responsive
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition
emergency lighting: press the hazard
lock. warning lamp button.
The interior light is activated for a short while or
when the SmartKey is removed from the X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
SmartKey.
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 245).
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers

Manual interior lighting control

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.

Vehicles with static LED headlamps:

Front overhead control panel Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
: u To switch the rear interior lighting its glass tube has been scratched.
on/off (Coupe only) The bulb may explode if:
; | To switch the automatic interior Ryou touch it
lighting control on/off Rit is hot
= p To switch the right-hand reading Ryou drop it
lamp on/off Ryou scratch it
? c To switch the front interior lighting
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
on/off
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
bulbs of the same type and the specified
on/off voltage.
X To switch the front interior lighting on/ Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
off: press the c button. life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
off (Coupe only): press the u button. glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
X To switch the reading lamps on/off: rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
press the p button. Protect bulbs from moisture during
operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into
contact with liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 143).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace
 Windshield wipers 143

yourself changed at a qualified specialist Changing the front bulbs

workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs, High-beam headlamps (static LED
consult a qualified specialist workshop. headlamps)
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps
The front and rear light clusters of your
vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do

Lights and windshield wipers

not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop which has the X Switch off the lights.
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
X Open the hood.
carry out the work required.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle
safety. You must therefore make sure that and pull it out.
these function correctly at all times. Have the X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
headlamp setting checked regularly. pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb it clockwise.
type can be found in the legend. X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.

Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
Static LED headlamps that has collected on the windshield can
: High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
Z
144 Windshield wipers

washed in an automatic car wash, wax or If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
other residues may be the reason for this. will no longer be wiped properly. This could
Clean the windshield using washer fluid prevent you from observing the traffic
after washing the vehicle in an automatic conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
car wash. year, ideally in spring and fall.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
Replacing the wiper blades
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated Important safety notes
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the G WARNING
windshield. If the windshield wipers begin to move while
For this reason, you should always switch you are changing the wiper blades, you could
Lights and windshield wipers

off the windshield wipers in dry weather. be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
Combination switch
a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
1 $ Windshield wiper off
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor you change the wiper blade. If you release
set to low sensitivity) the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
set to high sensitivity) windshield may be damaged by the force of
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow the impact.
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
B í Single wipe/î To wipe the the wiper blades changed at a qualified
windshield using washer fluid specialist workshop.
X Switch on the ignition. Replacing the wiper blades
X Turn the combination switch to the
corresponding position. Removing the wiper blades
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

wiping frequency is set automatically lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

according to the intensity of the rain. In X Fold the wiper arm away from the
the Å position, the rain sensor is more windshield until it engages.
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield wipers to wipe more
frequently.
 Windshield wipers 145

X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper

blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the

Lights and windshield wipers

direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer

on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
the direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.

Z
146 Windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
Lights and windshield wipers

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
 147

Useful information ............................ 148

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 148
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 152
Setting the air vents ......................... 159

Climate control
148 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most

particles of dust and soot and completely
i This Operator's Manual describes all filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous
models and all standard and optional pollutants and odors. A clogged filter
equipment of your vehicle available at the reduces the amount of air supplied to the
time of publication of the Operator's vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
Manual. Country-specific differences are always observe the interval for replacing
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the filter, which is specified in the
not be equipped with all features Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on
described. This also applies to safety- environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
related systems and functions. pollution, the interval may be shorter than
stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). i It is possible that the residual heat
function may be activated automatically an
hour after the SmartKey is removed. The
Climate control

Overview of climate control systems vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to

dry the automatic climate control.
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 158).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 96).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
 Overview of climate control systems 149

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only
: Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 158)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 156)

Climate control
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 156)
? Display
A Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 154)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 153)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 157)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 152)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 155)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 155)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 156)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 155)

USA only
: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 154)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 156)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 156)
? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 158)
A Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 157)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 153)
150 Overview of climate control systems

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 157)

D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 152)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 155)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 155)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 156)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 155)
I Display

Information about using dual-zone ECO start/stop function

automatic climate control During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
Automatic climate control start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
The following contains notes and climate control output, you can switch off the
Climate control

recommendations on optimum use of dual- ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
zone automatic climate control. button (Y page 170).
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side as well. The
indicator lamp above the á button goes
out.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for
approximately three seconds at the bottom
of the screen in the COMAND display. See
also the separate COMAND operating
instructions. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control
functions.
 Overview of climate control systems 151

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: To set climate control to automatic (Y page 154)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 156)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 156)
? Display
A To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 158)
B To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 158)
C To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 153)
D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 157)
E To switch climate control on/off (Y page 152)
F To set the temperature, right (Y page 155)
G To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 154)
H To set the airflow (Y page 156)
I To set the air distribution (Y page 155)
J To set the temperature, left (Y page 155)

Rear control panel

K To increase the temperature (Y page 155)
L Display
M To reduce the temperature (Y page 155)
152 Operating the climate control systems

Information about using 3-zone ECO start/stop function

automatic climate control During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
Automatic climate control start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
The 3-zone automatic climate control is only climate control output, you can switch off the
available on vehicles for Canada. ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
The following contains instructions and button (Y page 170).
recommendations to enable you to get the
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and Operating the climate control
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above systems
the à and ¿ buttons light up. Switching climate control on/off
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to set a climate mode General notes
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The When the climate control is switched off, the
Climate control

MEDIUM level is recommended. air supply and air circulation are also
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). switched off. The windows could fog up.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" Therefore, switch off climate control only
function briefly until the windshield is clear briefly
again. i Activate climate control primarily using
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. the à button (Y page 154).
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could Activating/deactivating
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the ignition lock (Y page 165).
temperature settings on the driver's side X To switch on: press the à button on
for the front-passenger side and the rear the control panel for the climate control.
compartment as well. The indicator lamp The indicator lamp above the à button
above the á button goes out. lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set
RUse the residual heat function if you want to automatic mode.
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior or
when the ignition is switched off. The X Press the ^ button.
residual heat function can only be activated The indicator lamp above the ^ button
or deactivated with the ignition switched goes out. The previously selected settings
off. are restored.
RVehicles with COMAND: if you change the X To switch off: press the ^ button.
settings of the climate control system, the The indicator lamp above the ^ button
climate status display appears for lights up.
approximately three seconds at the bottom
of the screen in the COMAND display. See
also the separate COMAND operating
instructions. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control
functions.
 Operating the climate control systems 153

Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-
dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is only available when the engine is
running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled
and dehumidified according to the

Climate control
temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.

Activating/deactivating
XTo activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button
lights up.
i When the "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function is activated,
one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary
heating button will light up on vehicles with
auxiliary heating.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button
goes out. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function has a delayed
switch-off feature.
154 Operating the climate control systems

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control: press

air distribution adjustment button
General notes
Climate control

F(Y page 149).

In automatic mode, the set temperature is 3-zone automatic climate control: press air
maintained automatically at a constant level. distribution adjustment button
The system automatically regulates the I(Y page 151).
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow The indicator lamp above the à button
and the air distribution. goes out.
The automatic mode functions optimally or
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
function is activated. If necessary, cooling airflow adjustment button G(Y page 149).
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
3-zone automatic climate control: press
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air- airflow adjustment button H(Y page 151).
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
The indicator lamp above the à button
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
goes out.
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-
dehumidification function only briefly. Adjusting the climate mode settings
The "Set climate mode" function is only
Activating/switching available with 3-zone automatic climate
control.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 165). You can select the following climate mode
settings in automatic mode:
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button. FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
The indicator lamp above the à button cooler
lights up. Automatic air distribution and MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
airflow are activated. DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when warmer and with less draft
automatic mode is activated, you can
select a climate mode (Y page 154).
X To switch to manual mode:
 Operating the climate control systems 155

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Only change the temperature setting in
ignition lock (Y page 165). small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X Press the à button. X To increase/reduce the temperature in
X Press climate mode selection button G up the rear compartment using the front
or down and select the desired level control panel: press the á button.
(Y page 151) The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
X Press temperature selection switch F or

Setting the temperature J up or down (Y page 151).

Only change the temperature setting in
Dual-zone automatic climate control
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Different temperatures can be set for the X To increase/reduce the temperature in
driver's and front-passenger sides. the rear compartment using the rear
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the control panel: press the r or s
ignition lock (Y page 165). button on the rear control panel.

Climate control
X To increase/reduce: press temperature Only change the temperature setting in
selection switch E or H up or down small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
(Y page 149).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
3-zone automatic climate control
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs the airflow through the center,
side and footwell air vents (Cabriolet
only)
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs airflow through the defroster,
center and side air vents (Cabriolet or
Coupe only: only for certain countries)
Automatic climate control zones a Directs air through the defroster and
You can select different temperature settings footwell vents
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment. i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the air vents. The side air vents can only be
ignition lock (Y page 165). closed when the controls on the side air
X To increase/reduce the temperature in vents are turned downwards.
the front compartment: press
temperature selection switch F or J up
or down (Y page 151).
156 Operating the climate control systems

Setting the air distribution not adopted for the front-passenger side
and the rear compartment.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X To deactivate: press the á button.
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
air distribution adjustment button F up or
down, until the desired symbol appears in Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
the display (Y page 149). temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
X 3-zone automatic climate control: press air
distribution adjustment button I up or 3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
down, until the desired symbol appears in
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the display (Y page 151).
the rear compartment.

Setting the airflow

Defrosting the windshield
Climate control

Dual-zone automatic climate control You can use this function to defrost the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the windshield or to defrost the inside of the
ignition lock (Y page 165). windshield and the side windows.
X To increase/reduce: press airflow switch Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"
G up or down (Y page 149). function as soon as the windshield is clear
again.
3-zone automatic climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X To activate: press the ¬ button.
ignition lock (Y page 165).
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
X To increase/reduce: press airflow switch
lights up.
H up or down (Y page 151).
The climate control system switches to the
If the battery is not sufficiently charged, following functions:
blower output may be reduced. As soon as Rhigh airflow
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
Rhigh temperature
output will be available.
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Switching the ZONE function on/off Rair-recirculation mode off

X To activate: press the á button. If the battery is not sufficiently charged,

The indicator lamp above the á button blower output may be reduced. Once the
lights up. battery is sufficiently charged again, full
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the blower output will be available again.
temperature setting for the driver's side is X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
not adopted for the front-passenger side. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
3-zone automatic climate control: the goes out. The previously selected settings
temperature setting for the driver's side is are restored. Air-recirculation mode
remains deactivated.
or
 Operating the climate control systems 157

X Press the à button. Defrosting the windows

The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set Windows fogged up on the inside
to automatic mode. X Activate the ¿ cooling with air
or dehumidification function.
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press X Activate automatic mode Ã.
temperature selection switch E or H up X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
or down (Y page 149). air is directed to the side windows.
3-zone automatic climate control: press X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
temperature selection switch F or J up the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
or down (Y page 151). i You should only select this setting until
or the windshield is clear again.
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
airflow switch G up or down Windows fogged up on the outside
(Y page 149).

Climate control
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
3-zone automatic climate control: press air distribution adjustment button F up or
airflow switch H up or down
down (Y page 149), until the P or
(Y page 151).
O symbol appears in the display.
X 3-zone automatic climate control: press air
distribution adjustment button I up or
MAX COOL maximum cooling
down (Y page 151), until the P or
The MAX COOL function is only available in O symbol appears in the display.
vehicles for the USA. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
MAX COOL is only operational when the directed to the side windows.
engine is running.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Rear window defroster
X To activate: press off-road button Ù
General notes
again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously The rear window defroster has a high current
selected settings are restored. draw. You should therefore switch it off as
When you activate MAX COOL, climate soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
control switches to the following functions: the rear window defroster switches off
automatically after several minutes.
Rmaximum cooling
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
Rmaximum airflow window defroster may switch off.
Rair-recirculation mode on

Activating/deactivating
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
lights up or goes out.
158 Operating the climate control systems

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
deactivated lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
be activated. defroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air- g button does not light up. Outside air

recirculation mode is added after about 30 minutes.

General notes
XTo deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp above the g button
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
Climate control

goes out.
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle i Air-recirculation mode deactivates
from outside. The air already inside the automatically:
vehicle will then be recirculated.
Rafter approximately five minutes at
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in outside temperatures below
particular at low temperatures. Only use air- approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the
windows from fogging up. cooling with air dehumidification is
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
same for all control panels.
outside temperatures above
Activating/deactivating approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the activated
ignition lock (Y page 165).
X To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp above the g button Activating/deactivating the residual
lights up. heat function
i Dual-zone automatic climate control: air- General notes
recirculation mode is automatically
activated at high outside temperatures. The residual heat function is only available in
3-zone automatic climate control: air- vehicles for Canada with automatic climate
recirculation mode is automatically control.
activated at high levels of pollution or at It is possible to make use of the residual heat
high outside temperatures. of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
When air-recirculation mode is activated for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
automatically, the indicator lamp above the has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the temperature that has been
set.
Coupe: optimum operation of the residual
heat function is only achieved with the side
 Setting the air vents 159

windows and panorama roof with power tilt/ In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
sliding panel closed. through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Cabriolet: optimum operation of the residual please observe the following notes:
heat function is only achieved when the soft Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
top is closed. and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Activating/deactivating Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the in the vehicle interior.

ignition lock or remove it (Y page 165).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
Setting the center air vents
The indicator lamp above the Ì button
lights up.
i If the residual heat function is activated,
the windows may fog up on the inside.

Climate control
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X To deactivate: press the Ì button. : Center air vent, left
The indicator lamp above the Ì button ; Center air vent, right
goes out. = Center vent thumbwheel, right
Residual heat is deactivated automatically: ? Center vent thumbwheel, left
Rafter approximately 30 minutes X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
and ? up or down.
Rif the battery voltage drops

Setting the side air vents

Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior. : Defroster vent
; Side air vent
= Control for side air vent

Z
160 Setting the air vents

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or Setting the rear-compartment air

down. vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
Setting the glove box air vent compartment

! Close the air vent when heating the

vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
Climate control

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel, only for Canada with
3-zone automatic climate control
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
: Air vent thumbwheel
; Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated, Setting the blower output of the
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance AIRSCARF vents (Cabriolet)
to cool its contents. The level of airflow G WARNING
depends on the airflow and air distribution
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
settings.
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
clockwise or counter-clockwise. is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head restraints.
This could result in burns in the immediate
vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
 Setting the air vents 161

You can adjust the blower output of

AIRSCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF
button (Y page 124).

Climate control

Z
162
 163

Useful information ............................ 164

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 164
Driving ............................................... 164
Automatic transmission ................... 172

Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 179
Parking ............................................... 182
Driving tips ........................................ 184
Driving systems ................................ 189
164 Driving

Useful information i You should also observe these notes on

breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
i This Operator's Manual describes all train on your vehicle have been replaced.
models and all standard and optional i Always observe the respective speed
equipment of your vehicle available at the limits.
Driving and parking

time of publication of the Operator's

Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Driving
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety- Important safety notes
related systems and functions.
G WARNING
i Read the information on qualified Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Important safety notes stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
New and replaced brake pads and discs only securely and as specified in order to ensure
reach their optimum braking effect after sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
several hundred kilometers of driving. loose floormats and do not place floormats on
Compensate for this by applying greater force top of one another.
to the brake pedal.
G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
The first 1000 miles(1500 km)
of the pedals, e.g.:
The more you look after the engine when it is Rshoes with thick soles
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
Rshoes with high heels
performance in the future.
Rslippers
RYou should therefore drive at varying
vehicle and engine speeds for the first There is a risk of an accident.
1000 miles (1500 km). Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full usage of the pedals.
throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the
G WARNING
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
red area of the tachometer.
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
for example, the power steering and the brake
pedal past the point of resistance boosting effect. You will require considerably
(kickdown). more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase of an accident.
the engine speed gradually and accelerate Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
the vehicle to full speed.
 Driving 165

G WARNING KEYLESS-GO
If the parking brake has not been fully
General notes
released when driving, the parking brake can:
RDo not store the KEYLESS-GO key together
Roverheat and cause a fire with:

Driving and parking

Rlose its hold function. - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release or another SmartKey
the parking brake fully before driving off. - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metal
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
objects, e.g. metal cases.
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature. This can affect the functionality of
KEYLESS-GO.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
is stationary. SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
button.
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
drive train. ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
Key positions in succession corresponds to the different
SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This
SmartKey is only the case if you are not depressing the
brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. You should, however,
g To remove the SmartKey always take the SmartKey with you when
(shift the transmission to position P) leaving the vehicle. As long as the
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the
as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) Start/Stop button and
Relectrically powered equipment can be
and drive position
3 To start the engine operated.

i The SmartKey can be turned in the

ignition lock even if it is not the correct
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Z
166 Driving

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

Driving and parking

Start/Stop button
= USA only
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light ? Canada only
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
see (Y page 277). Starting the engine
X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition Important safety notes
lock ;.
G WARNING
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
they could:
approximately two seconds recognition
time. You can then use Start/Stop Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
button :. people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Activating power supply
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
motion if, for example, they:
SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
Rrelease the parking brake.
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
The power supply is switched on. You can Rshift the automatic transmission out of
now activate the windshield wipers, for parking position P.
example. Rstarting the engine.

Switching on the ignition There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
XPosition 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
button : twice.
leave children or animals unattended in the
The ignition is switched on.
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
i The ignition is switched off when: reach of children.
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once G WARNING
when in this position. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
 Driving 167

the engine running in enclosed spaces lock and the SmartKey must be in the
without sufficient ventilation. vehicle.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
G WARNING depressed.
Flammable materials introduced through X Press the Start/Stop button once

Driving and parking

environmental influence or by animals can (Y page 165).
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or The engine starts.
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that Pulling away
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust Automatic transmission
system.
G WARNING
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal If the engine speed is above the idling speed
when starting the engine. and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
General notes is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
i The catalytic converter is preheated for always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The not simultaneously accelerate.
sound of the engine may change during this
time. ! If a warning tone sounds and the
Release Park. Brake message appears
Automatic transmission in the multifunction display, the parking
X Shift the transmission to position P. brake is still applied. Release the parking
The transmission position display in the brake.
multifunction display shows P. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
i You can also start the engine when the
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
transmission is in position N.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 183).

Starting procedure with the SmartKey X Release the brake pedal.

X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i To start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ i It is only possible to shift the transmission
Stop button out of the ignition lock. from position P to the desired position if
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
ignition lock (Y page 165) and release it as the parking lock released. If you do not
soon as the engine is running. depress the brake pedal, you can move the
DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock
remains engaged.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
i The Start/Stop button can be used to pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
start the vehicle without inserting the drop down.
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
You can open the doors from the inside at
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition
any time.

Z
168 Driving

You can also deactivate the automatic start/stop function thereby helps you to
locking feature (Y page 245). reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating Important safety notes
Driving and parking

temperature more quickly. G WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and
Hill start assist you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. There is a risk of accident and injury.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. the ignition and secure the vehicle against
This gives you enough time to move your foot rolling away.
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to General notes
roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start : ECO start/stop display
assist. If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
function switches the engine off
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
X Pull away.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
Hill start assist is not active if: SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on start/stop function is activated.
a downhill gradient. If the ECO start/stop function has been
Rthe transmission is in position N. manually deactivated (Y page 170) or a
Rthe parking brake is applied.
malfunction has caused the system to be
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
RESP® is malfunctioning.
displayed.
For further information on automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 169) and automatic
ECO start/stop function
engine start (Y page 169).
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is
stopped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
 Driving 169

Automatic engine switch-off automatically. It is then not necessary to

continue applying the brakes during the
General notes automatic stop phase. When you depress
The ECO start/stop function is operational the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in automatically and the braking effect of the

Driving and parking

the multifunction display, if: HOLD function is deactivated.
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green. Automatic engine start
Rthe outside temperature is within the
General notes
comfort range.
The engine starts automatically if:
Rthe engine is at normal operating
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe vehicle starts to roll.

Rthe system detects that the windshield is Rthe brake system requires this.

not fogged up when the air-conditioning Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
system is switched on. deviates from the set range.
Rthe hood is closed. Rthe system detects moisture on the

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's windshield when the air-conditioning
seat belt is fastened. system is switched on.
Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too
If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will low.
be shown in yellow. Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the
driver's door is opened.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped Vehicles with automatic transmission
automatically. The engine is started automatically if you:
i The engine can be switched off Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
automatically a maximum of four times activated and the transmission is in
(first stop and three subsequent stops) in position D or N.
succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
yellow in the multifunction display after the Rmove the transmission out of position P.
engine has been started automatically for
the fourth time. The automatic engine i Shifting the transmission to position P
switch-off is available once again when the does not start the engine.
¤ symbol is shown in green in the i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
multifunction display. the ECO start/stop function is available
Vehicles with automatic transmission again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
the engine automatically.
i The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off

Z
170 Driving

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
Driving and parking

ECO button
X To switch off: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
the multifunction display go out.
X To switch on: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine switch-off
(Y page 169) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 169) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
 Driving 171

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

Driving and parking

can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 166). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 334).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.

The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 315). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Z
172 Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission transmission position P, R, N or D appears

in the transmission position display
Important safety notes (Y page 172) in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Transmission position and drive
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking

program display
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There ! If the transmission position display in the
is a risk of an accident. multifunction display is not working, you
When engaging transmission position D or R, should pull away carefully to check whether
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the desired transmission position is
not simultaneously accelerate. engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program
G WARNING E or S.
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake. : Transmission position display
; Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive
DIRECT SELECT lever program appear in the multifunction display.
Overview of transmission positions i The arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
 Automatic transmission 173

Shifting to neutral N
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:

Driving and parking

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

j Park position with parking lock motion if, for example, they:
k Reverse gear Rrelease the parking brake.
i Neutral Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
h Drive park position P
RStart the engine.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of arrow P. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
i The automatic transmission shifts into SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
park position P automatically: leave children or animals unattended in the
Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
vehicle is stationary in transmission reach of children.
position D or R
Rif you open the door while traveling at X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
very low speeds in transmission position brake pedal.
D or R X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS: if the
vehicle is braked using the HOLD function or If the engine has been switched off, the
DISTRONIC PLUS, the automatic automatic transmission automatically shifts
transmission shifts automatically to to N.
transmission position P. In addition, at least If the automatic transmission is to remain in
one of the following conditions must be neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
fulfilled: washes with a towing device, please observe
Rthe engine is switched off. the following instructions:
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt Using the SmartKey:
is not in the buckle. RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
Engaging reverse gear R brake pedal and keep it depressed.
RShift to neutral N.
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary. RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
first point of resistance.

Z
174 Automatic transmission

Using KEYLESS-GO: Transmission positions

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
B Park position
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed. Do not shift the transmission into
REngage park position P.
position P(Y page 182) unless the
Driving and parking

vehicle is stationary. The parking

RRelease the brake pedal.
lock should not be used as a brake
RRemove the Start/Stop button from the when parking. Always apply the
ignition lock. parking brake in addition to the
RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. parking lock in order to secure the
RSwitch on the ignition. vehicle.
RDepress the brake pedal and keep it If the vehicle electronics are
depressed. malfunctioning, the transmission
RShift to neutral N. may be locked in position P. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
RRelease the brake pedal.
immediately at a qualified
RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
specialist workshop.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
C Reverse gear
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Only shift the transmission to R
Engaging drive position D when the vehicle is stationary.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the A Neutral

brake pedal. Do not shift the transmission to N
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past while driving. Otherwise, the
the first point of resistance. automatic transmission could be
damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7 Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
 Automatic transmission 175

Changing gear Program selector button

The automatic transmission shifts to the General notes
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position D. This automatic
gearshifting behavior is determined by:

Driving and parking

Rthe selected drive program (Y page 175)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed

Driving tips
Kickdown
Program selector button
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and Program selector button on vehicles with the
forth between transmission positions D and dynamic handling package or Sports package AMG
R can help to free a vehicle that has become X Press program selector button :
stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine repeatedly until the letter for the desired
management restricts switching between gearshift program appears in the
transmission positions D and R to speeds up multifunction display.
to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift
back and forth between transmission The program selector button allows you to
positions D and R, move the selector lever up choose between different driving
and down beyond the pressure point. characteristics.
i The permanent drive program M is
available on the following vehicles:
Rvehicles with the dynamic handling
package
Rvehicles with Sports package AMG

Further information about permanent drive

program M(Y page 177).
As well as this permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
program M(Y page 176).

Z
176 Automatic transmission

E Economy Comfortable, economical Automatic drive program

driving
Automatic drive programs E and S
S Sport Sporty driving style Drive program E is characterized by the
M Manual Manual gear shifting following:
Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

i For further information on the automatic forward and reverse gears, unless the
drive program, see (Y page 176). accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
Only change from automatic drive program
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
E or S to manual drive program M when the
example
vehicle is stationary.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
i The automatic transmission shifts to sooner. This results in the vehicle being
automatic drive program E each time the driven at lower engine speeds and the
engine is started. wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the
following:
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Rsporty engine settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic
transmission shift points

Manual drive program M

General notes
In the manual drive program, you can change In this drive program, you can briefly change
gears manually using steering wheel paddle gear yourself by using the steering wheel
shifters : and ;. paddle shifters. The transmission must be in
Further information about permanent drive position D.
program M(Y page 177). You can activate manual drive program M in
Further information about temporary drive the E and S automatic drive programs.
program M(Y page 176). i As well as temporary drive program M,
i You can only change gear with the you can also activate permanent drive
steering wheel paddle shifters when the program M(Y page 175).
transmission is in position D. Further information about permanent drive
program M(Y page 177).
 Automatic transmission 177

Activating The gearshift recommendations assist you in

X Shift the transmission to position D. adopting an economical driving style. The
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle recommended gear is shown in the
shifter (Y page 176). multifunction display.
Manual drive program M is temporarily X Shift to recommended gear ; according

Driving and parking

activated. The selected gear and M appear to gearshift recommendation : when
in the multifunction display. shown in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel Deactivating
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission If you have activated manual drive program
switches to manual drive program M for a M, it will remain active for a certain amount
limited amount of time. Depending on which of time. Under certain conditions the
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
transmission immediately shifts into the next the case of lateral acceleration, during an
gear down or up, if permitted. overrun phase or when driving on steep
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering terrain.
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 176). If manual drive program M has been
The automatic transmission shifts up to the deactivated, the automatic transmission
next gear. shifts into the automatic drive program that
i If the maximum engine speed on the was last selected, i.e. E or S.
currently engaged gear is reached and you You can also deactivate manual drive
continue to accelerate, the automatic program M yourself:
transmission automatically shifts up in X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel
order to prevent engine damage. paddle shifter and hold it in place
XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand (Y page 176).
steering wheel paddle shifter or
(Y page 176). X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
The automatic transmission shifts down to transmission position.
the next gear.
or
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
X Use the program selector button to change
engine speed when shifting down, the
the drive program (Y page 175).
automatic transmission protects against
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
engine damage by not shifting down.
The automatic transmission switches into
i Automatic down shifting occurs when the automatic drive program that was last
coasting. selected, i.e. E or S.
Shift recommendation
Manual drive program
General information
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D.

Z
178 Automatic transmission

i As well as this permanent drive program cluster, pull on the right-hand steering
M, you can also activate temporary drive wheel paddle shifter (Y page 176).
program M(Y page 176). The automatic transmission shifts to
recommended gear ;.
Switching on the manual drive program
Driving and parking

X Press the program selector button Downshifting

(Y page 175) repeatedly until M appears in X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
the multifunction display. shifter.
The manual drive program is only available on The automatic transmission shifts down to
vehicles with the dynamic handling package the next gear.
or AMG sports package.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
Manual drive program M is different from shifting down, the automatic transmission
drive program S with regard to spontaneity, will shift down to a gear that will allow the
responsiveness and smoothness of gear vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
using the program selector button. In manual downshifting, the automatic transmission
drive program M, you can change gear using does not shift to a lower gear if this would
the steering wheel paddle shifters if the result in the maximum engine speed being
transmission is in position D. The gear exceeded.
selected is shown in the multifunction
display. Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum
Upshifting acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
shifter. pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the The automatic transmission shifts to a
next gear. lower gear depending on the engine speed.
i During kickdown, you cannot change gear
Shift recommendation using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

Switching off the manual drive program

X Press the program selector button
(Y page 175) repeatedly until E or S
appears in the multifunction display.

The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The
recommended gear is shown in the
multifunction display.
X If corresponding gearshift
recommendation : appears in the
multifunction display on the instrument
 Refueling 179

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

Driving and parking

workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.

Transfer case Refueling

! Performance tests may only be carried Important safety notes
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be G WARNING
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
workshop for a performance test. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
! If the parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer, the ignition must be You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
button in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will
refueling.
otherwise automatically intervene. The
brake system could otherwise be damaged.
G WARNING
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
with either the front or the rear axle raised, There is a risk of injury.
as doing so will damage the transmission. You must make sure that fuel does not come
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
transmitted to both axles. vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Z
180 Refueling

If you or others come into contact with fuel, If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
observe the following: out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
using soap and water. by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, inside of the fuel filler flap.
Driving and parking

immediately rinse them thoroughly with For further information on fuel and fuel quality
clean water. Seek medical assistance (Y page 384).
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce Refueling
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
has come into contact with fuel. Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 179).
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the : To open the fuel filler flap
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter ; To insert the fuel filler cap
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the = Tire pressure table
wrong fuel could result in damage to the ? Fuel type to be used
fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the GO.
fuel system.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the next to the filling pump indicates the side of
paintwork. the vehicle.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
 Refueling 181

To open the fuel filler flap Closing the fuel filler flap
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.

Driving and parking

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
: To open the fuel filler flap flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 262).
; To insert the fuel filler cap
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
= Tire pressure table
lamp may light up (Y page 282).
? Fuel type to be used
For further information on warning and
X Switch the engine off. indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition see (Y page 282).
lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.

Z
182 Parking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 165).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 82).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.
Important safety notes
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or G WARNING
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with If you leave children unsupervised in the
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. example:
Park the vehicle so that no flammable Rreleasing the parking brake
materials come into contact with parts of the Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not the parking position P
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain Rstarting the engine.
fields.
They could also operate the vehicle's
G WARNING equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available When leaving the vehicle, always take the
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
for example, the power steering and the brake leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
 Parking 183

! Always secure the vehicle correctly If you try to switch off the engine when the
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle transmission is not in position P, a message
or its drivetrain could be damaged. appears in the multifunction display. A signal
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against sounds.
rolling away unintentionally:

Driving and parking

Rthe parking brake must be applied. Parking brake
Rthe transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the G WARNING
ignition lock. If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front brake, the braking distance is considerably
wheels must be turned towards the curb. longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
Switching off the engine vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
Important safety notes wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to G WARNING
neutral position N when you switch off the
If you leave children unsupervised in the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
risk of an accident.
example:
After switching off the engine, always switch
Rreleasing the parking brake
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
parking brake. the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
injury.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Using the SmartKey SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i The SmartKey can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P.
Using KEYLESS-GO
XPress the Start/Stop button (Y page 165).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i When the driver's door is closed, this
corresponds to key position 1. When the
driver's door is open, this corresponds to If you brake the vehicle with the parking
key position 0: "key removed". brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
Z
184 Driving tips

X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. distracted from traffic conditions. You could
When the engine is running, the $ (USA also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp of an accident.
lights up in the instrument cluster. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
X To release: depress the brake pedal and is stationary.
Driving and parking

keep it depressed.
X Pull release handle :. Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
When the ignition is switched on or the
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster. If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
Parking the vehicle for a long period
before operating the telephone.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
exhaustive discharging. a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than second.
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use. Drive sensibly – save fuel
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and Observe the following tips to save fuel:
seek advice.
X The tires should always be inflated to the
i You can obtain information about trickle recommended tire pressure.
chargers from a qualified specialist X Remove unnecessary loads.
workshop.
X Remove roof racks when they are not
needed.
Driving tips X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
G WARNING interval display.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, Fuel consumption also increases when
safety-relevant functions are only available driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, and in hilly terrain.
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
Drinking and driving
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. G WARNING
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
If you operate mobile communication affect your reflexes, perceptions and
equipment while driving, you will be judgment.
 Driving tips 185

The possibility of a serious or even fatal driving style in terms of consumption, taking
accident is greatly increased when you drink the actual and selected conditions into
or take drugs and drive. consideration. Your driving style can
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow significantly influence the vehicle's
anyone to drive who has been drinking or consumption.

Driving and parking

taking drugs. The ECO display consists of three bars:
RAcceleration
Emission control RConstant
RCoasting
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust The percent value is the average value of the
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling three bars. The three bars and the mean value
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There begin at the value of 50%. A higher
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave percentage indicates a more economical
the engine running in enclosed spaces driving style.
without sufficient ventilation. The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
Certain engine systems are designed to keep count in the ECO display does not indicate a
the level of poisonous components in exhaust fixed consumption figure.
fumes within legal limits. Apart from driving style, consumption is
These systems only work at peak efficiency if dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
they are serviced exactly in accordance with Rload
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
Rtire pressure
reason, only have work on the engine carried
Rcold start
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Benz technicians. Rchoice of route

The engine settings must not be changed Relectrical consumers switched on

under any circumstances. Furthermore, all These factors are not taken into
specific service work must be carried out at consideration by the ECO display.
regular intervals and in accordance with the The evaluation of your driving style is carried
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details out using the following three categories:
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECO display gives you information on how
economical your driving style is. The ECO
display assists you in achieving the optimum

Z
186 Driving tips

RAcceleration (evaluation of all Braking

acceleration processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, Important safety notes
especially at higher speeds G WARNING
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Driving and parking

RConstant (assessment of driving behavior an attempt to increase the engine's braking

at all times): effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
- The bar fills up: constant speed and There is an increased danger of skidding and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration accidents.
and deceleration Do not shift down for additional engine
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed braking on a slippery road surface.
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes): Downhill gradients
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
! On long and steep gradients, you must
keeping your distance and early release reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
without use of the brakes. advantage of the engine braking effect and
- The bar empties: frequent braking helps avoid overheating and excessive
i An economical driving style specially wear of the brakes.
requires driving at moderate engine When you take advantage of the engine
speeds. braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
To achieve a higher value in the categories for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
Acceleration and Constant: surface. This could cause damage to the
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
drive train. This type of damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Rdrive in drive program E.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
on the highway, only the bar for Constant brakes to rub by constantly applying light
will change. pressure to the pedal. This results in
i The ECO display summaries the driving excessive and premature wear to the brake
characteristics from the start of the journey pads.
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the Heavy and light loads
journey. On longer journeys, there are
G WARNING
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
Further information on the ECO display increases the stopping distance and can even
(Y page 236). cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
 Driving tips 187

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Observe additional warning messages in

results in excessive and premature wear to the multifunction display.
the brake pads. The brake fluid level may be too low due to
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but Have the brake system checked

Driving and parking

drive on for a short while. This allows the immediately. This work should be carried
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
Wet roads performance tests may only be carried out
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are
without braking, there may be a delayed planning to have the vehicle tested on such
reaction from the brakes when braking for the a dynamometer, contact an authorized
first time. This may also occur after the Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
vehicle has been washed or driven through information first. Otherwise, you could
deep water. damage the drive train or the brake system.
You have to depress the brake pedal more ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the system operates automatically, the engine
vehicle in front. and the ignition must be switched off
After driving on a wet road or having the (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or
attention to the traffic conditions. This will 1) while the parking brake is being tested
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them on a brake dynamometer.
more quickly and protecting them against Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
corrosion. by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®
system operates automatically, the engine
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt and the ignition system must be switched
residue may form on the brake discs and off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the
brake pads. This can result in a significantly ignition lock or Start/Stop button in
longer braking distance. position 0 or 1) when:
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
Rtesting the parking brake on a brake
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
dynamometer.
endanger other road users when doing so.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
the front axle raised.
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
ahead.
system.
Servicing the brakes All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
the instrument cluster and you hear a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
warning tone while the engine is running,
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
the brake fluid level may be too low.
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
188 Driving tips

If the brake system has only been subject to Winter driving

moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular Important safety notes
intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake
pedal when driving at a high speed. This
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Driving and parking

improves the grip of the brake pads.

an attempt to increase the engine's braking
You can find a description of Brake Assist
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
(BAS) at (Y page 69) or of BAS PLUS with
There is an increased danger of skidding and
Intersection Assist at (Y page 70).
accidents.
The braking characteristics of the vehicle can
Do not shift down for additional engine
be seriously impaired if:
braking on a slippery road surface.
Rbrake pads other than those recommended
are installed G DANGER
Rthe recommended brake fluid is not used If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed. ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Driving on wet roads becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
Hydroplaning
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
If water has accumulated to a certain depth running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
on the road surface, there is a danger of around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
hydroplaning occurring, even if: ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
Ryou drive at low speeds. a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
in conditions in which hydroplaning may specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
occur, you must drive in the following Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
manner: section (Y page 346).
Rlower your speed.
Ravoidruts. Driving with summer tires
Rbrake carefully. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 346).
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Slippery road surfaces
Check the depth of any water before driving G WARNING
through it. Drive slowly through standing
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
This can damage the electronic
There is an increased danger of skidding and
components in the engine or the automatic
accidents.
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this Do not shift down for additional engine
can cause engine damage. braking on a slippery road surface.
 Driving systems 189

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be store any road speed above 20 mph
stopped when moving at low speed: (30 km/h).
X Shift the transmission to position N.
Important safety notes
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise

Driving and parking

and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an
control or DISTRONIC PLUS. accident nor override the laws of physics.
Cruise control cannot take into account the
i For more information on driving with road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
snow chains, see (Y page 347). control is only an aid. You are responsible for
The outside temperature indicator is not the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
designed to serve as an ice-warning device speed, for braking in good time and for
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. staying in your lane.
Changes in the outside temperature are Do not use cruise control:
displayed after a short delay. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Indicated temperatures just above the allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
freezing point do not guarantee that the road in heavy traffic or on winding roads
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
driving style. Always adapt your driving style
skid
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
weather conditions.
heavy rain or snow
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
freezing point. driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
in time. By doing so, you will make use of the
braking effect of the engine. This relieves the : To activate or increase speed
load on the brake system and prevents the
; To activate or reduce speed
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly. = To deactivate cruise control
Use cruise control only if road and traffic ? To activate at the current speed/last
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a stored speed
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can

Z
190 Driving systems

When you activate cruise control, the stored Storing the current speed or calling up
speed is shown in the multifunction display the last stored speed
for five seconds.
G WARNING
Activation conditions If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
Driving and parking

than the current speed, the vehicle

To activate cruise control, all of the following decelerates. If you do not know the stored
activation conditions must be fulfilled: speed, the vehicle could decelerate
Rthe parking brake must be released. unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph Pay attention to the road and traffic
(30 km/h). conditions before calling up the stored speed.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Storing and maintaining the current

speed

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
You can accept the current speed if you are pedal.
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). The first time cruise control is activated, it
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired stores the current speed or regulates the
speed. speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Setting a speed
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
 Driving systems 191

X Press the cruise control lever up : for a Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Ryou depress the parking brake
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly (30 km/h)
press the cruise control lever up : or RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Driving and parking

down ; to the pressure point. Ryou shift the transmission to position N
Every time the cruise control lever is
while driving
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
stored is increased or reduced.
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph
Control Off message in the multifunction
increments (10 km/h increments): display for approximately five seconds.
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point. i When you switch off the engine, the last
Every time the cruise control lever is speed stored is cleared.
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
DISTRONIC PLUS
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For General notes
example, if you accelerate briefly to DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
overtake, cruise control adjusts the automatically helps you maintain the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored distance to the vehicle detected in front.
after you have finished overtaking. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
Deactivating cruise control automatically so that the set speed is not
exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is
especially important if the vehicle is laden. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
There are several ways to deactivate cruise prevent a collision without your intervention.
control: An intermittent warning tone will then sound
X Briefly press the cruise control lever and the distance warning lamp will light up in
forwards :. the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
or in front or take evasive action provided it is
X Brake. safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.

Z
192 Driving systems

DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). warnings nor intervene in such situations.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on There is a risk of an accident.
roads with steep gradients. Always pay careful attention to the traffic
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, situation and be ready to brake.
Driving and parking

it can resemble the radar detectors of the

responsible authorities. You can refer to the G WARNING
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
questions are asked about this. identify other road users and complex traffic
i USA only: This device has been approved situations.
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
The radar sensor is intended for use in an Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
automotive radar system only. Removal, brake the vehicle
tampering, or altering of the device will void Rneither give a warning nor intervene
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
Raccelerate unexpectedly
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way. There is a risk of an accident.
Any unauthorized modification to this Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
device could void the user's authority to brake, in particular when warned to do so by
operate the equipment. DISTRONIC PLUS.

i Canada only: This device complies with G WARNING

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
subject to the following two conditions:
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
1. This device may not cause harmful If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
interference, and PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
2. this device must accept any interference a risk of an accident.
received, including interference that may In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
cause undesired operation of the device. try to take evasive action.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use is activated, the vehicle brakes
in any non-approved way. automatically in certain situations. To
Any unauthorized modification to this prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
device could void the user's authority to DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
operate the equipment. the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Important safety notes Rin the car wash
G WARNING If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
Rpeopleor animals DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
Rstationaryobstacles on the road, e.g. the road, traffic and weather conditions.
stopped or parked vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
Roncoming and crossing traffic responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
 Driving systems 193

front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good Cruise control lever
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.

Driving and parking

in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow : To store the current speed or a higher
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow speed
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or ; To store the current speed or a lower
vehicles driving on a different line. speed
In particular, the detection of obstacles can = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
be impaired if: ? To store the current speed or call up the
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else last stored speed
covering the sensors A To set the specified minimum distance
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
parking garages Activation conditions
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may following conditions must be fulfilled:
unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
stored speed. to two minutes after pulling away before
This speed may: DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe parking brake must be released.
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane RESP® must be active, but not intervening.

Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass RActive Parking Assist must not be
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive activated.
countries) Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
vehicles driving on the right (right-hand shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
drive countries) fastened.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.
driver of the speed stored. Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Z
194 Driving systems

Activating or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an

accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
Driving and parking

desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down = until the desired speed
is set. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
you :.
pedal.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
pedal.
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
stored speed.
time it is activated, the current speed is
i If you do not fully release the accelerator stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive speed to the previously stored value.
message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slower- Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed Pulling away and driving
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set
is 18 mph (30 km/h).
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
 Driving systems 195

X If you want to pull away with Changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
the brake pedal. PLUS supports you when:
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph
you :. (70 km/h)

Driving and parking

or RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
X Accelerate briefly. distance to a vehicle in front
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
speed to that of the vehicle in front. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
If no vehicle is detected in front, your of collision
vehicle accelerates to the set speed.
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
i The vehicle can also pull away when it is is accelerated. Acceleration will be
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
on a different line from another vehicle. The or if the distance between your vehicle and
vehicle then brakes automatically. There is the vehicle in front becomes too small.
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
all times. monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise drive vehicles.
control.
Stopping
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your G WARNING
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
selected is maintained. only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. the voltage supply.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
to the speed you have stored. with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
Selecting the drive program vehicle occupant or from outside the
vehicle.
DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving
Rthe electrical system in the engine
style when you have selected the S driving
program (Y page 175). Acceleration behind compartment, the battery or the fuses have
the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
noticeably more dynamic. If you have
selected the E driving program, the vehicle Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
accelerates more gently. This setting is e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
recommended in stop-and-start traffic. There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 198).

Z
196 Driving systems

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle briefly press the cruise control lever
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until up : or down ; to the pressure point.
it is stationary. Every time the cruise control lever is
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stationary and you do not need to depress the stored is increased or reduced.
Driving and parking

brake.
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
Depending on the specified minimum
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
speed stored after you have finished
at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
overtaking.
front. The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
Setting the specified minimum distance
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to You can set the specified minimum distance
position P if: for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
Rthe
between one and two seconds. With this
driver's door is open and the driver's
function, you can set the minimum distance
seat belt is unfastened.
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
automatically switched off by the ECO see this distance in the multifunction display
start/stop function. (Y page 197).
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
with the minimum distance as required by
Setting a speed law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.

X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. You can set the specified minimum distance
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly between one and two seconds. With this
press the cruise control lever up : or function, you can set the minimum distance
down ; to the pressure point. that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
Every time the cruise control lever is front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed see this distance in the multifunction display
stored is increased or reduced. (Y page 197).
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
 Driving systems 197

X To increase: turn control ; in direction Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is

=. deactivated
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.

Driving and parking

X To decrease: turn control ; in
direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

speedometer : Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 240).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is

Example: vehicles featuring automatic activated
transmission with a DIRECT SELECT lever
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the ; Specified minimum distance to the
multifunction display vehicle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
General notes
? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
In the Assistance menu (Y page 240) of the appears when the cruise control lever is
on-board computer, you can select the actuated)
assistance display.
X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 240).

Z
198 Driving systems

i You will see the stored speed for about multifunction display for approximately five
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC seconds.
PLUS.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Driving and parking

Pay particular attention in the following traffic

situations:
RCornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
ROther vehicles changing lanes
RNarrow vehicles
RObstructions and stationary vehicles
RCrossing vehicles

There are several ways to deactivate In such situations, brake if necessary.

DISTRONIC PLUS: DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever Cornering, going into and coming out of a
forwards :. bend
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
deactivated if: vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Ryou engage the parking brake
Vehicles traveling on a different line
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door is open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
 Driving systems 199

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles Obstructions and stationary vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes

Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short. Crossing vehicles
Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect

vehicles that are crossing your lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
because of its narrow width. The distance to your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
the vehicle in front will be too short.

Z
200 Driving systems

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist following a vehicle which is driving towards
the edge of the road, your vehicle could come
General notes into contact with the curb or other road
boundaries. In the case of deviations in road
markings, beware of other road users, e.g.
Driving and parking

cyclists, that are in the direct vicinity of your

vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the
lane or projecting out into the lane are not
detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
can be corrected at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist aids you in
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist cannot
keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving
continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In
lane by means of moderate steering
some cases, the steering intervention is not
interventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph
sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane.
(0 - 200 km/h).
In such cases, you must steer the vehicle
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist monitors yourself to ensure that it does not leave the
the area in front of your vehicle by means of lane.
camera system :, at the top of the
The system may be impaired or may not
windshield. function if:
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses on
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
lane markings that are present.
to snow, rain, fog or spray
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h) Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses on
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
the vehicle in front, taking into account lane
surface is wet)
markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
traffic jam.
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for
vicinity of the camera
the Steering Assist function to be available.
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
Important safety notes present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
If you fail to adapt your driving style, area
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist can neither Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Assist cannot take into account road, small and the lane markings thus cannot be
weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC detected
PLUS Steering Assist is only an aid. You are Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
lanes branch off, cross one another or
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
merge
time and for staying in your lane.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
detect road and traffic conditions. If you are
 Driving systems 201

Pay attention also to the important safety Information in the multifunction display
notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192).
The steering interventions are carried out
with a limited steering moment. The system
requires the driver to keep his hands on the

Driving and parking

steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you If DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is
with a visual warning. A steering wheel activated but is not ready for a steering
symbol appears in the multifunction display. intervention, steering wheel symbol :
If you have still not started to steer and have appears in grey. If the system provides you
not taken hold of the steering wheel after five with support by means of steering
seconds, a warning tone also sounds to interventions, symbol : is shown in green.
remind you to take control of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is then Deactivating Steering Assist
switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with
remains active. Steering Assist function using the on-board
The system is switched to passive and no computer (Y page 242).
longer assists you by performing steering The DTR+ Steering Assistant Off
interventions if: message appears in the multifunction
Ryou
display. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist
actively change lanes
is deactivated.
Ryou switch on the turn signal
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated,
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is
do not steer for a prolonged period of time
deactivated automatically.
i After you have finished changing lanes,
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is
automatically active once more. HOLD function
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not General notes
provide assistance:
Ron
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
very sharp corners
following situations:
Rif no lane markings or no clear lane
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
markings have been detected
Rif the vehicle in front is not detected at
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
speeds below 37 mph (60 km/h)
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Rin tire run-flat mode
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
Activating Steering Assist driver having to depress the brake pedal.
X Select the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
Assist function using the on-board function deactivated when you depress the
computer (Y page 242). accelerator pedal to pull away.
The DTR+: Steering Assistant On
message appears in the multifunction
display. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist
is activated.

Z
202 Driving systems

Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Driving and parking

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Make sure that the activation conditions
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. are met.
Rthe electrical system in the engine X Depress the brake pedal.
compartment, the battery or the fuses have X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
been tampered with. until ë: appears in the multifunction
Rthe battery is disconnected
display.
There is a risk of an accident. The HOLD function is activated. You can
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off release the brake pedal.
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
against rolling away.
time does not activate the HOLD function,
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function wait briefly and then try again.
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To Deactivating the HOLD function
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate The HOLD function is deactivated
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in automatically if:
the following or other similar situations:
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
Rwhen towing the vehicle position D or R.
Rin the car wash
Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
Activation conditions certain amount of pressure until ë
You can activate the HOLD function if: disappears from the multifunction display.
Rthe Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been When the HOLD function is activated, the
automatically switched off by the ECO transmission is shifted automatically to
start/stop function position P if:
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
is fastened seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe parking brake is released Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N automatically switched off by the ECO
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated start/stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
 Driving systems 203

Dynamic handling package with i Your selection remains stored until you
sports mode switch off the engine.

General notes Comfort tuning

The most important part of the dynamic

Driving and parking

handling package with sports mode is the
adjustable damping system. This
automatically controls and adapts the
suspension to the respective driving
situation.
The calibration of the suspension depends
on:
Ryour driving style
Rthe road surface conditions
Ryour individual selection; see the following
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
description of your vehicle are more comfortable.
Vehicles with dynamic handling package Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
with sports mode: In addition to the drive more comfortable driving style. Select
programs E and S, there is also the manual comfort mode also when driving fast on
drive program M(Y page 176). straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
freeway.
Sports tuning X If indicator lamp = is not lit: press
button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. The
comfortable suspension setting is
selected.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
Example: position of dynamic handling package take account of road, weather and traffic
with sports mode button conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
sports mode ensures even better contact front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
with the road. Select this mode when time and for staying in your lane.
employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
winding country roads. ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far
X Start the engine. as necessary when pulling away.
X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press RAccelerate less when driving.
button :.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The sports
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
suspension setting is selected. Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Z
204 Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on

wheels must remain either on the ground uneven terrain.
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full you:
contact with the ground.
Rswitch on the ignition
Driving and parking

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N

effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
Rrelease the parking brake
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are speeds.
permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
improves the traction of your vehicle
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
whenever a drive wheel spins due to
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
insufficient grip.
Range of the sensors
PARKTRONIC General notes
Important safety notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
consideration that are:
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle animals or objects
and an object. Rabove the detection range, e.g.

PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a overhanging loads, truck overhangs or

replacement for your attention to your loading ramps.
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
when they are in the immediate vicinity of side (example)
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects. The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function
The sensors may not detect snow and other
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
care not to scratch or damage them
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic (Y page 323).
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
 Driving systems 205

warning tone sounds. If the distance falls

below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.

Warning displays

Driving and parking

Example: side view

Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
Example: top view The warning displays show the distance
Front sensors between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. on the dashboard above the center air vents.
100 cm) The warning display for the rear area in the
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. Coupe is located on the headliner in the rear
60 cm) compartment; in the Cabriolet, it is between
the rear seats.
Rear sensors The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
120 cm) yellow segments showing operational
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. readiness = light up.
80 cm) The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
Minimum distance determine which warning display is active
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. when the engine is running.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a

Z
206 Driving systems

Transmission Warning display

position
D Front area activated
R or N Rear and front areas
Driving and parking

activated
P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the Cabriolet
vehicle's distance from the obstacle. : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
From the: ; Indicator lamp
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds. deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
seconds. This indicates that you have now when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
reached the minimum distance. in the ignition lock.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Coupe
: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
 Driving systems 207

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 323).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on result in a collision with another road user.
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol There is a risk of an accident.
indicates a suitable parking space. Active Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
steering intervention and brake application vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active
can assist you during parking. You may also Parking Assist parking procedure.
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 204).
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
Important safety notes obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
the wheels or tires.
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking spaces which are not suitable for
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that parking, for example:
no persons, animals or objects are in the Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
maneuvering range. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking Assist is also unavailable.

Z
208 Driving systems

Parking tips: G WARNING

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the If there are objects above the detection range:
parking space as possible. RActive Park Assist may steer too early
RParking spaces that are littered or
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
overgrown might be identified or measured
Driving and parking

objects.
incorrectly.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
a risk of an accident.
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
If there are objects above the detection range,
as such or be measured incorrectly.
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. For further information on the detection
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC range (Y page 204).
(Y page 205) warning messages during the Active Parking Assist does not support you
parking procedure. with parking spaces at right-angles to the
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure direction of travel if:
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Rtwo parking spaces are located directly
Assist will then be canceled. next to one another
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
from your vehicle, you should not use obstacle such as a low curb
Active Parking Assist. Ryou park forwards
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
Active Parking Assist does not support you
chains are installed.
with parking spaces that are parallel or at
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
right-angles to the direction of travel if:
always correct. This has a direct influence
Rthe parking space is on a curb
on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle. Rthe system reads the parking space as
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: being blocked, for example by foliage or
grass paving blocks
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
direction of travel
maneuver into
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging Example: detected parking space
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods : Detected parking space on the left
vehicles. ; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
 Driving systems 209

Active Parking Assist is switched on Parking

automatically when driving forwards. The
i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
system is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
operation, the system independently locates Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are

Driving and parking

and measures parking spaces on both sides
of the vehicle. responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
spaces: symbol shows the desired parking space in
Rthat the instrument cluster.
are parallel or at right-angles to the
direction of travel X Shift the transmission to position R.

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide % message appears in the multifunction
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your
vehicle % button on the multifunction steering
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of wheel or pull away.
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider or
than your vehicle X To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
i In the case of parking spaces that are at
steering wheel.
right angles to the direction of travel,
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
please ensure that the parking space is
and Brake Observe Surroundings
long enough to accommodate your vehicle.
message appears in the multifunction
When driving at speeds below 19 mph display.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a
status indicator in the instrument cluster.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
When a parking space has been detected, an X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake
arrow towards the right or the left also at all times. When backing up, drive at a
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist speed below approximately 6 mph
only displays parking spaces on the front- (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist
passenger side. Parking spaces on the will be canceled.
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
signal on the driver's side is activated. When a standstill when the vehicle is in the
parking on the driver's side, this must remain parking space.
switched on until you acknowledge the use of Maneuvering may be required in tight
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a parking spaces.
button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Select D
The system automatically determines Observe Surroundings message appears in
whether the parking space is parallel or at the multifunction display.
right-angles to the direction of travel.
X Shift the transmission to position D while
A parking space is displayed while you are the vehicle is stationary.
driving past it, and until you are Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. the other direction.

Z
210 Driving systems

The Park Assist Active Accelerate cancel the parking procedure with Active
and Brake Observe Surroundings Parking Assist.
message appears in the multifunction RYou can also engage forward gear
display. prematurely. The vehicle redirects and
i You will achieve the best results by does not drive as far into the parking space.
Driving and parking

waiting for the steering procedure to Should a gear be changed too early, the
complete before pulling away. parking procedure will be canceled. A
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all sensible parking position can no longer be
times. achieved from this position.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
a standstill. Exiting a parking space
The Park Assist Active Select R In order that Active Parking Assist can
Observe Surroundings message appears in support you when you exit the parking space:
the multifunction display. Rthe border of the parking space must be
Further transmission shifts may be high enough at the front and the rear. A
necessary. curb is too small, for example.
As soon as the parking procedure is Rthe border of the parking space must not
complete, the Park Assist Disabled be too wide, as the position of the vehicle
message appears in the multifunction display must not exceed an angle of 45° to the
and you will hear a tone. The vehicle is now starting position as it is maneuvering into
parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the parking space.
the driver having to depress the brake pedal. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
The braking effect is canceled when you (1.0 m) must be available.
depress the accelerator pedal.
i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
applications. When Active Parking Assist is Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst
finished, you must steer and brake again the vehicle exits the parking space. You are
yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. responsible for braking in good time.
X Maneuver if necessary. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
X Always observe the warning messages
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 205).
Active Parking Assist.
Parking tips: X Start the engine.
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
parking space after parking is dependent you are pulling away.
on various factors. These include the X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
position and shape of the vehicles parked
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
in front and behind it and the conditions of
% message appears in the multifunction
the location. It may be the case that Active
display.
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
X To cancel the procedure: press the
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or % button on the multifunction steering
onto the curb. If necessary, you should wheel or pull away.
or
 Driving systems 211

X To exit a parking space using Active X Stop the movement of the multifunction
Parking Assist: press the a button on steering wheel or steer yourself.
the multifunction steering wheel. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
The Park Assist Active Accelerate once. The Park Assist Canceled
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction

Driving and parking

message appears in the multifunction display.
display. or
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. center console (Y page 206).
Do not exceed a maximum speed of PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active The Park Assist Canceled message
Parking Assist will be canceled. appears in the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as Active Parking Assist is canceled
required while the vehicle is stationary. automatically if:
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Rthe transmission is shifted too early
the other direction. The Park Assist
Rtransmission position P is selected
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no

in the multifunction display. longer possible

i You will achieve the best results by Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph

waiting for the steering procedure to (10 km/h)

complete before pulling away. Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In

If you back up after activation, the steering such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead up in the instrument cluster.
position. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
X Drive forwards and back up as instructed disappears and the multifunction display
by the PARKTRONIC warning displays. shows the Park Assist Canceled
message.
Once you have exited the parking space
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
completely, the steering wheel is moved to
must steer and brake again yourself.
the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone
and the Park Assist Finished message Vehicles with automatic transmission: if a
appears in the multifunction display. You will system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
then have to steer and merge into traffic on braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You accelerator again.
can take over the steering, before the vehicle
has exited the parking space completely. This
is useful, for example when you recognize
that it is already possible to pull out of the
parking space.

Canceling Active Parking Assist

You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.

Z
212 Driving systems

Rear view camera Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
General notes Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Driving and parking

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed

Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and
setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the
Example: Coupe vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle
rack).
Rear view camera : is located in the handle
strip of the trunk lid. Activating/deactivating the rear view
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and camera
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
display. is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. setting is active in COMAND, see the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
i The text of messages shown in the X Engage reverse gear.
COMAND display depends on the language The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
setting. The following are examples of rear COMAND display with guide lines.
view camera messages in the COMAND
display. To deactivate: the rear view camera
deactivates if you shift the transmission to P
Important safety notes or after driving forwards a short distance.

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not Displays in the COMAND display
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always The rear view camera may show a distorted
responsible for safe maneuvering and view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make not at all. The rear view camera does not show
sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the following positions:
objects in the area in which you are Rvery close to the rear bumper
maneuvering. Runder the rear bumper
Under the following circumstances, the rear Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
view camera will not function, or will function handle
in a limited manner:
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
Rif the trunk lid is open be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rat night or in very dark places
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
 Driving systems 213

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch C Bumper

Rthe rear section of an HGV D Red guide line at a distance of
Ra slanted post approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
Use the guidelines only for orientation. rear of the vehicle
Approach objects no further than the The guide lines are shown when the

Driving and parking

bottom-most guideline. transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle Additional messages for vehicles with
; White guide line without turning the PARKTRONIC
steering wheel, vehicle width including : Front warning display
the exterior mirrors (static) ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width operational readiness indicator
including the exterior mirrors, for current = Rear warning display
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
steering wheel angle (dynamic) PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 204), an
additional operational readiness indicator will
appear in COMAND display ;. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.

A Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

Z
214 Driving systems

"Reverse parking" function Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
Driving and parking

: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
: White guide line without turning the
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel, vehicle width including steering wheel angle (dynamic)
the exterior mirrors (static)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width X Make sure that the rear view camera is
including the exterior mirrors, for current switched on (Y page 212).
steering wheel angle (dynamic) The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
= Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear vehicle to a standstill.
of the vehicle X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the

? Red guide line at a distance of steering wheel in the direction of the

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the parking space until yellow guide line ;
rear of the vehicle reaches parking space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 212). and back up carefully.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide lines :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide lines : as a guide,
carefully reverse until you reach the end
position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
 Driving systems 215

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly 360° camera

in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel General notes
with the parking space marking as The 360° camera is a system consisting of
possible. four cameras.

Driving and parking

The system analyzes images from the
following cameras:
RRear view camera
RFront camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view
mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate
surroundings of the vehicle. The system
supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is
restricted at an exit.
Driving to the final position The 360° camera images can be shown in full
: White guide line at current steering wheel screen mode or in six different split-screen
angle views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
; Parking space marking view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
X Turn the steering wheel to the center This view is calculated from the data supplied
position while the vehicle is stationary. by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle)
Rtop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Rtop view and enlarged front view
Rtop view and pictures from the rearward
facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
Rtop view and pictures from the forward
: Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)
rear of the vehicle When the function is active and you shift the
; White lane with steering wheel straight transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic
guidelines are hidden.
= End of parking space
When you change between transmission
X Back up carefully until you have reached positions D and R, you see the previously
the final position. selected front or rear view.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in Important safety notes
the parking space.
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show
a distorted view of obstacles, show them

Z
216 Driving systems

incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate
not a substitute for attentive driving. COMAND operating instructions
You are always responsible for safe Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there Activating the 360° camera using the
Driving and parking

are no persons, animals or objects in the area SYS button

in which you are maneuvering.
X Press and hold the W button for longer
You are always responsible for safety, and
than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND
must always pay attention to your
operating instructions.
surroundings when parking and
Depending on whether position D or R is
maneuvering. This applies to the areas
engaged, the following is shown:
behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You
Rfull screen display with the image from
could otherwise endanger yourself and
others. the front camera
Rfull screen display with the image from
The 360° camera will not function or will
function in a limited manner: the rear camera
Rif the doors are open
Rif
Activating the 360° camera with
the exterior mirrors are folded in
COMAND
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
X Press the W button; see the separate
Rat night or in very dark places
COMAND operating Instructions.
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright
or
light X Select System by turning cVd the
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
COMAND controller and press W to
lighting (the display may flicker) confirm.
Rif you exit a heated garage in winter, X Select 360° Camera and press W to

resulting in a rapid change in temperature confirm.

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
Rif the vehicle components in which the
Ra split screen with top view and the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
image from the front camera or
event, have the camera position and setting
Ra split screen with top view and the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
image from the rear view camera
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage For further information about the COMAND
to objects or the vehicle. controller, see the separate COMAND
Guide lines are always shown at road level. operating instructions.

Activation conditions Activating the 360° camera using

reverse gear
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
The 360° camera images can be
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° automatically displayed by engaging reverse
camera gear.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock
 Driving systems 217

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
2 in the ignition lock. Rin the transitional areas between the
X Make sure that the Activation by R various cameras in the virtual top view
gear setting is active in COMAND, see the ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
separate COMAND operating instructions.
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

Driving and parking

X To show the 360° camera image: engage
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the Rthe drawbar of a trailer
COMAND display in split-screen mode. You Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
see the top view of the vehicle and the Rthe rear section of an HGV
image from the rear view camera. Ra slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Selecting the split-screen and full Approach objects no further than the
screen displays bottom-most guideline.
X To switch between split screen views: Top view with picture from the rear view
switch to the line with the vehicle icons by camera
sliding ZV the COMAND controller.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
select one of the vehicle symbols.
X To switch to full screen mode: select
Full Screen by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
i The full screen option is only available in
the following views:
RTop view with picture from the rear view
camera : Symbol for the split screen setting with
RTop view with picture from the front
top view and rear view camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of
camera
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
Displays in the COMAND display
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
Important safety notes including the exterior mirrors, for current
The camera system may show a distorted steering wheel angle (dynamic)
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or ? Yellow lane marking tires at current
not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the steering wheel angle (dynamic)
system in the following locations: A Yellow guide line for the maximum
Runder the front and rear bumpers steering angle
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle/trunk lid handle

Z
218 Driving systems

A Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front
of the vehicle
B Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
Driving and parking

front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

B Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
D Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
E Bumper
: Symbol for the split screen setting with
The guide lines are shown when the top view and rear view camera image
transmission is in position R. enlarged
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line at a distance of
objects that are at ground level. approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
Top view with picture from the front rear of the vehicle
camera This view assists you in estimating the
distance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.

: Symbol for the split screen setting with

top view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front
of the vehicle
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
 Driving systems 219

Top view with picture from the mirror PARKTRONIC appears:

camera Rin split screen view as red or yellow
brackets around the vehicle icon in the top
view, or
Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand

Driving and parking

side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon
i The full screen display can also be
selected as front view.
Select this view when you are driving out of
an exit and the view of crossing traffic is
restricted, for example.
: Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing mirror camera setting Object detection
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side
of vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
i You can also select the mirror camera
setting for the rear-facing view.

Wide-angle function
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
; Bar for marking a detected object
In full screen mode, the 360° camera can
detect both moving and stationary objects. If,
for example, a pedestrian or another vehicle
is detected, these objects are marked with
bars ;. The system is only able to detect and
mark stationary objects when your vehicle is
moving. By contrast, stationary objects will
Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC always be detected and marked.
display
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
Exiting 360° camera display mode
view camera image
; PARKTRONIC warning display As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC activated, the function switches off. The
and the function is active (Y page 206), COMAND display switches back to the
warning displays ; in the COMAND display previously selected view. You can also switch
are also active or light up accordingly. the display by selecting the & symbol in the

Z
220 Driving systems

display and pressing W the COMAND ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
controller to confirm. continue your journey and starts assessing
The 360° camera display is also ended if you your tiredness again if:
select transmission position P. Ryou switch off the engine.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
Driving and parking

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or

ATTENTION ASSIST to take a break.
General notes
Displaying the attention level
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to
125 mph (200 km/h) range. If
ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators
of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue You can have current status information
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to displayed in the assistance menu
recognize them at all. The system is not a (Y page 240) of the on-board computer.
substitute for a well-rested and attentive X Select the Assistance display for Attention
driver. Assist using the on-board computer
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is (Y page 240).
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
The following information is displayed:
not occur at all:
Rlength of the journey since the last break.
Rif the length of the journey is less than
Rthe attention level determined by
approximately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar
display in five levels from high to low.
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
Rif there is a strong side wind
the attention level and a warning cannot be
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
issued, the System Passive message
with high cornering speeds or high rates of appears. The bar display then changes the
acceleration display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed
Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h).
124 mph (200 km/h)
Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS
active steer assist activated
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
 Driving systems 221

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Lane Tracking package

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- General notes
board computer (Y page 242).
The system determines the attention level The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
of the driver depending on the setting Spot Assist (Y page 221) and Lane Keeping

Driving and parking

selected: Assist (Y page 223).
Standard selected: the sensitivity with
Blind Spot Assist
which the system determines the attention
level is set to normal. General notes
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
higher. The attention level detected by to monitor the areas on both sides of your
Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
the driver is warned earlier. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the display in the exterior mirrors draws your
À symbol and OFF appear in the attention to vehicles detected in the
multifunction display in the assistance monitored area. If you then switch on the
display when the engine is running. corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been you will also receive a visual and audible
deactivated, it is automatically reactivated collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
after the engine has been stopped. The sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
sensitivity selected corresponds to the last purposes.
selection activated (standard/sensitive).
Important safety notes
Warning in the multifunction display G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
If fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration are detected, a warning Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
appears in the multifunction display: placing them in the blind spot area
Attention Assist: Take a Break! Rvehicles which approach with a large speed

In addition to the message shown in the differential and overtake your vehicle
multifunction display, you will then hear a As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warning tone. warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
X If necessary, take a break. an accident.
X Confirm the message by pressing the Always observe the traffic conditions
a button on the steering wheel. carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
still detects increasing lapses in sufficient distance to the side for other road
concentration, you will be warned again after users and obstacles.
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only
happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects i USA only:
typical indicators of fatigue or increasing This device has been approved by the FCC
lapses in concentration. as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
Z
222 Driving systems

with, or altering the device will void any be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
warranties, and is not permitted by the driving in the middle of their lane. This may
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
any non-approved way. inner edge of their lanes.
Any unauthorized modification to this Due to the nature of the system:
Driving and parking

device could void the user’s authority to Rwarnings may be issued in error when
operate the equipment. driving close to crash barriers or similar
Monitoring range of the sensors solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if: extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
covering the sensors
are integrated into the sides of the rear
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
snow or spray dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or The sensors must not be covered, for
bicycles example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Rthe road has very wide lanes Following a severe impact or in the event of
Rthe road has narrow lanes damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated. Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
Example: Coupe lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the is operational.
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
 Driving systems 223

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot Lane Keeping Assist

monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the General notes
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the

Driving and parking

blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
Collision warning mounted at the top of the windshield. Active
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the the road and can warn you before you leave
corresponding turn signal, a double warning your lane unintentionally.
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If This function is available in the range between
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
are indicated by the flashing of red warning 200 km/h).
lamp :. There are no further warning tones. A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
by means of intermittent vibration in the
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
(Y page 242) is activated in the on-board
computer. Important safety notes
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the G WARNING
ignition lock. Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors recognize lane markings.
light up red for approximately In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
is a risk of an accident.

Z
224 Driving systems

You should always steer, brake or accelerate the lines in the assistance graphics display
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane (Y page 240) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist. Keeping Assist is ready for use.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Standard

Driving and parking

Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
an accident nor override the laws of physics. occurs if:
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are period of time.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the Adaptive
vehicle in the lane. When Adaptive is selected, no warning
The system may be impaired or may not vibration occurs if:
function if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to the warnings are suppressed for a certain
insufficient illumination of the road, or due period of time.
to snow, rain, fog or spray Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, ABS, BAS or ESP®.
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
surface is wet) Ryou brake hard.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the obstacle or change lanes quickly.
vicinity of the camera Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
In order that you are warned only when
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road necessary and in good time if you cross the
construction work lane marking, the system recognizes certain
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or conditions and warns you accordingly.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
bend.
detected
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
highway.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 242).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
 Driving systems 225

Active Driving Assistance package i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC
General notes as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
The Active Driving Assistance package sensor is intended for use in an automotive
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191), radar system only. Removing, tampering

Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 225) and with, or altering the device will void any
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 228). warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Active Blind Spot Assist any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
General notes device could void the user’s authority to
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor operate the equipment.
system, pointed toward the rear of the
i Canada only: This device complies with
vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
subject to the following two conditions:
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
your attention to vehicles detected in the 1. This device may not cause harmful
monitored area. If you then switch on the interference, and
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you 2. this device must accept any interference
will also receive an optical and audible received, including interference that may
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is cause undesired operation of the device.
detected, corrective braking may help you Removal, tampering, or altering of the
avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting device will void any warranties, and is not
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
evaluates the space in the direction of travel in any non-approved way.
and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Any unauthorized modification to this
Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which device could void the user's authority to
are pointed in the direction of travel. operate the equipment.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
Important safety notes integrated into the front and rear bumpers
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make
not a substitute for attentive driving. sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
G WARNING
rear sensors must not be covered, for
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Following a severe impact or in the event of
placing them in the blind spot area damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed the radar sensors checked at a qualified
differential and overtake your vehicle specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may may otherwise no longer work properly.
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Z
226 Driving systems

Monitoring area be the case if there are vehicles at the edge

G WARNING of their lane.
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all Due to the nature of the system:
traffic situations and road users. There is a Rwarnings may be issued in error when
risk of an accident. driving close to crash barriers or similar
Driving and parking

Always make sure that there is sufficient solid lane borders.

distance on the side for other traffic or Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
obstacles. extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
Example: Coupe
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up are then not indicated.
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
diagram. up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
the case of: (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
covering the sensors If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
spray (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not corresponding side lights up red. This warning
indicated or indicated with a delay. is always given when a vehicle enters the
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect blind spot monitoring range from behind or
narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
bicycles, or may only detect them too late. the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
driving in the middle of their lane. This may Spot Assist is no longer active.
 Driving systems 227

The brightness of the indicator/warning If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lamps is adjusted automatically according to lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
the ambient light. course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
Visual and acoustic collision warning collision.
If you switch on the turn signals to change

Driving and parking

If a course-correcting brake application
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
sounds. In addition, ; appears in the
double warning tone and red warning
multifunction display.
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the In very rare cases, the system may make an
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no inappropriate brake application. An
inappropriate course-correcting brake
further warning tones.
application may be interrupted at any time if
Course-correcting brake application you steer slightly in the opposite direction or
accelerate, for example.
G WARNING
The course-correcting brake application is
A course-correcting brake application cannot
available in the speed range between
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of
20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
an accident.
Either no braking application, or a course-
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
correcting brake application adapted to the
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
driving situation occurs if:
you or makes a course-correcting brake
application. Always maintain a safe distance Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
at the sides. barriers, located on both sides of your
vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 242) is activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Z
228 Driving systems

Active Lane Keeping Assist G WARNING

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
General notes
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Driving and parking

Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area Terminate the intervention in a non-critical
in front of your vehicle by means of camera driving situation.
system : at the top of the windshield.
Various different areas to the front, rear and The system may be impaired or may not
side of your vehicle are also monitored with function if:
the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
the road and can warn you before you leave
to snow, rain, fog or spray
your lane unintentionally. If you do not react
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
to the warning, a lane-correcting application
of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
the original lane. surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
200 km/h). vicinity of the camera
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must bumpers or the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.
be operational obscured by snow
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
Important safety notes markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active construction work
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
risk of accident nor override the laws of covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
take account of road and weather conditions. small and the lane markings thus cannot be
It may not recognize traffic situations. Active detected
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
lanes branch off, cross one another or
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
merge
time and for staying in your lane.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
 Driving systems 229

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane on one side. This is meant to assist you in
and there are broken lane markings detected, bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
no lane-correcting brake application is made. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
display.
A warning may be given if a front wheel

Driving and parking

passes over a lane marking. It will warn you A lane-correcting brake application can be
by means of intermittent vibration in the made after driving over a lane marking
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. recognize as being solid or broken. Before
this, a warning must be given by means of
Lane-correcting brake application intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
G WARNING In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized.
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original In the case of a broken lane marking being
lane. There is a risk of an accident. detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
detected in the adjacent lane. The following
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
vehicles can have an influence on brake
you or makes a lane-correcting brake
application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that
application.
are overtaking and vehicles that are driving
parallel to your vehicle.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects i A further lane-correcting brake
traffic conditions or road users to a limited application can only occur after your
extent. In very rare cases, the system may vehicle has returned to the original lane.
make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. No lane-correcting brake application occurs
after intentionally driving over a solid lane if:
marking. There is a risk of an accident. Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
An inappropriate brake application may be accelerate.
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles. high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane
in which you are driving.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
If you leave your lane, under certain There is a possibility that the Active Lane
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly Assistant could misjudge the given traffic

Z
230 Driving systems

situation. An inappropriate brake application The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
may be interrupted at any time if you: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction bend.
Rswitch on the turn signal Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
Rclearly brake or accelerate highway.
Driving and parking

A lane-correcting brake application is Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

interrupted automatically if: The warning vibration occurs later if:
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. Rthe road has narrow lanes.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 242).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 240) are shown in green. Active
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when

necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
 231

Useful information ............................ 232

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 232
Displays and operation .................... 232
Menus and submenus ...................... 235
Display messages ............................. 248
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 276
232 Displays and operation

Useful information multifunction display. You should therefore

On-board computer and displays

make sure your vehicle is operating safely at

i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident.
equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel
time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 31).
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features Displays and operation
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions. Coolant temperature display

i Read the information on qualified G WARNING

specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
Important safety notes gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
G WARNING Let an overheated engine cool down before
If you operate information systems and opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
communication equipment integrated in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted and contact the fire department.
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
! A display message is shown if the coolant
accident. temperature is too high.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic If the coolant temperature is over
situation permits. If you are not sure that this 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention engine will otherwise be damaged.
to traffic conditions and operate the The coolant temperature gauge is in the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary. instrument cluster on the left-hand side
(Y page 31).
G WARNING Under normal operating conditions and with
If the instrument cluster has failed or the specified coolant level, the coolant
malfunctioned, you may not recognize temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an Tachometer
accident.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked this could damage the engine.
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
You must observe the legal requirements for The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
the country in which you are currently driving engine when the red band is reached.
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the
 Displays and operation 233

Outside temperature display Operating the on-board computer

On-board computer and displays

You should pay special attention to road Overview
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display (Y page 234).
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 189):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 191):

One or two segments in the set speed : Multifunction display

range light up. ; Switches on the Voice Control System;
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: see the separate operating instructions
The segments between the speed of the = Right control panel
vehicle in front and the stored speed light ? Left control panel
up. A Back button
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.

Z
234 Displays and operation

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

On-board computer and displays

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute

9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: operating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial

: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station

Right control panel : Text field

~ RRejectsor ends a call ; Menu bar
RExits
phone book/redial = Drive program (Y page 172)
memory ? Transmission position (Y page 172)
A Permanent display: outside temperature
6 RMakes or accepts a call
or speed (Y page 243)
RSwitches to the redial memory
X To show menu bar;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
 Menus and submenus 235

Text field : shows the selected menu or Trip menu

On-board computer and displays

submenu as well as display messages.
The following messages may appear in the
Standard display
multifunction display:
Z Shift recommendation
(Y page 176)
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 207)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 189)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 140) X Press and hold the % button on the
¤ ECO start/stop function steering wheel until the Trip menu with
(Y page 168) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
ë HOLD function (Y page 201) shown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Menus and submenus Reset"
Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to call up the menu bar and
select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 233).
Depending on the equipment installed in the Example: trip computer "From Start"
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: : Distance
RTrip menu (Y page 235) ; Time
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) = Average speed
(Y page 237) ? Average fuel consumption
RAudio menu (Y page 238)
X Press the = or ; button on the
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 239)
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
RDriveAssist menu (assistance) X Press 9 or : to select From Start
(Y page 240) or From Reset.
RServ. menu (Y page 243)
The values in the From Start submenu are
RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 243)
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 236).
The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

Z
236 Menus and submenus

The From Reset trip computer is Digital speedometer

On-board computer and displays

automatically reset if the value exceeds

9999 hours or 99,999 miles.

ECO display

: Shift recommendation (Y page 176)

; Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the
Example: ECO display steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X Press the = or ; button on the
digital speedometer.
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Resetting values
ECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 185).

Displaying the range and current fuel Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
consumption
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the You can reset the values of the following
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. functions:
X Press the 9 or : button to select the RTripodometer
current fuel consumption and approximate R"From Start" trip computer
range.
R"From Reset" trip computer
The approximate range that can be covered RECO display
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount i When you reset the values in the "ECO
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows display", the values in the trip computer
a vehicle being refueled C instead of the "From Start" are likewise reset. When you
range. reset the values in the trip computer "From
Start", the values in the "ECO display"are
likewise reset.
 Menus and submenus 237

Navigation system menu Change of direction announced without a

On-board computer and displays

lane recommendation
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information on navigation, see the separate
operating instructions.
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
: Road into which the change of direction
X Press the = or ; button on the
leads
steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
Route guidance not active = Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
: Direction of travel Change of direction announced with a
; Current road lane recommendation

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
: Distance to the destination = New lane during a change of direction
; Distance to the next change of direction ? Uninterrupted lane
= Current road A Lane recommendation
? "Follow the road's course" symbol B Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.

Z
238 Menus and submenus

Other status indicators of the i For information on switching waveband

On-board computer and displays

navigation system and storing stations; see the separate

RO: you have reached the destination or an
operating instructions.
intermediate destination. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
RNew Route... or Calculating Route: normal radio.
calculating a new route For more information on satellite radio
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle operation, see the separate operating
position is outside the area of the digital instructions.
map (off-map position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to Operating an audio player or audio
the selected destination. media

Audio menu
Selecting a radio station

Example: CD/DVD changer display

: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
: Waveband
equipment installed in the vehicle.
; Station frequency with memory position X Switch on COMAND and activate audio
CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the
i Station ; is displayed with the station separate operating instructions.
frequency or station name. The memory X Press the = or ; button on the
position is only displayed along with steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
station ; if this has been stored.
X To select the next/previous track:
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND briefly press the 9 or : button.
and select Radio; see the separate X To select a track from the track list
operating instructions. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
X Press the = or ; button on the 9 or : button until desired
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. track : has been reached.
X To select a stored station: briefly press
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
the 9 or : button. rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
X To select a station from the station audio drives or data carriers support this
list: press and briefly hold the 9 function.
or : button. If track information is stored on the audio
If no station list is received: device or medium, the multifunction display
X To select a station using the station will show the number and title of the track.
search: press and briefly hold the 9 The current track does not appear in audio
or : button. AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
 Menus and submenus 239

Video DVD operation X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to

On-board computer and displays

COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone READY or the name of the network
Example: CD/DVD changer display
: Current scene provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; RPhone No Service: there is no network
see the separate operating instructions. available or the mobile phone is searching
X Press the = or ; button on the for a network.
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene: Accepting a call
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
scene : has been reached.

Telephone menu Example: incoming call

X Press the 6 button on the steering
Introduction
wheel to accept an incoming call.
G WARNING If someone calls you when you are in the
If you operate information systems and Tel menu, a display message appears in the
communication equipment integrated in the multifunction display.
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted You can accept a call even if you are not in
from traffic conditions. You could also lose the Tel menu.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Rejecting or ending a call
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this X Press the ~ button on the steering
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention wheel.
to traffic conditions and operate the You can end or reject a call even if you are not
equipment when the vehicle is stationary. in the Tel menu.
When telephoning, you must observe the Dialing an entry from the phone book
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving. X Press the = or ; button on the
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
separate operating instructions). X Press the 9, : or a button to

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate switch to the phone book.

operating instructions).
Z
240 Menus and submenus

X Press the 9 or : button to select the Assistance menu

On-board computer and displays

desired name.
or
Introduction
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing. In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options:
or
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
X If there is more than one number for a
(Y page 240)
particular name: press the 6 or a
RActivating/deactivating
button to display the numbers.
ESP®(Y page 241)
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
number you want to dial.
(Y page 241)
X Press the 6 or a button to start
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
dialing.
ASSIST (Y page 242)
or
RActivating/deactivating the distance
X To exit the telephone book: press the
warning function (Y page 241)
~ or % button.
RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist of
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 242)
Redialing RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
The on-board computer saves the last names or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 242)
or numbers dialed in the redial memory. RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping

X Press the = or ; button on the Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist

steering wheel to select the Tel menu. (Y page 242)
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
Displaying the assistance graphic
redial memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
desired name or number. to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 6 or a button to start X Press 9 or : to select Assist.

dialing. Graphic.
or X Press the a button.

X To exit the redial memory: press the The multifunction display shows the
~ or % button. DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic (Y page 197).
X Press 9 or : to display the
ATTENTION ASSIST assessment
(Y page 220).
 Menus and submenus 241

The assistance graphic can display the status X Press the a button.

On-board computer and displays

of and information from other driving systems The current selection is displayed.
or driving safety systems. X To activate/deactivate: press the a
The assistance graphic shows: button again.
Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
(Y page 220) is deactivated. in the instrument cluster lights up
Rthe lane markings as bright lines when Lane continuously when the engine is running.
Keeping Assist (Y page 223) or Active Lane If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
Keeping Assist (Y page 228) is activated. warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
Rthe æ symbol when the distance available due to a malfunction.
warning function (Y page 71) is Observe the information on warning lamps
deactivated. (Y page 279).
Rthe æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 76) is deactivated. (Y page 249).

Deactivating/activating ESP® Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

i Observe the "Important safety notes" Brake
section in the description of ESP PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
(Y page 74). with DISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNING X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer to select the DriveAssist menu.
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased X Press the 9 or : button to select
risk of skidding and an accident. PRE-SAFE Brake.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations X Press the a button.
described in the following. The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the button again.
following situations:
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
Rwhen using snow chains assistance graphic shows the æ symbol
Rin deep snow in the multifunction display.
Ron sand or gravel
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
For further information about ESP®, see see (Y page 76).
(Y page 74).
X Start the engine. Activating/deactivating the distance
X Press the = or ; button on the warning function
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist X Press the = or ; button on the
menu. steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
X Press the 9 or : button to select menu.
ESP. X Press 9 or : to select Distance
Warning.

Z
242 Menus and submenus

X Press the a button. multifunction display in the assistance

On-board computer and displays

The current selection is displayed. graphics display.

X To activate/deactivate: press the a For further information about ATTENTION
button again. ASSIST, see (Y page 220).
When the distance warning function is
deactivated, the assistance graphic shows Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
the æ symbol in the multifunction display. Assist
Further information on the distance warning X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
function (Y page 71). to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Activating/deactivating Steering Blind Spot Asst.
Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS X Press the a button.
X Press the = or ; button on the The current selection is displayed.
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist X To activate/deactivate: press the a
menu. button again.
X Using 9 or :, select DTR+: Steer.
For further information about Blind Spot
Asst. Assist, see (Y page 221).
X Press the a button.
For further information about Active Blind
The current selection is displayed. Spot Assist, see (Y page 225).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again. Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
When the steering assist of DISTRONIC Assist
PLUS is activated, the multifunction display
shows the DTR+: Steering Assistant
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
On message. to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
For further information on the steering assist
Lane Keep. Assist.
of DISTRONIC PLUS: (Y page 200).
X Press the a button.

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION The current selection is displayed.

ASSIST X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu. Standard or Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press 9 or : to select Attention
Assist. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the
X Press the a button.
multifunction display shows the lane
The current selection is displayed. markings as bright lines in the assistance
X Press a to confirm. graphic.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
For further information about Lane Keeping
Standard or Sensitive. Assist, see (Y page 223).
X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information about Active Lane
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, Keeping Assist, see (Y page 228).
the é symbol appears in the
 Menus and submenus 243

Maintenance menu Instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles
in the multifunction display.
You can determine whether the multifunction
In the Serv menu, you have the following
display shows some messages in miles or
options:
kilometers.
RCalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 248) X Press the = or ; button on the
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
system (Y page 352) X Press the : or 9 button to select the

RChecking the tire pressure electronically Inst. Cluster submenu.

(Y page 352) X Press a to confirm.
RCalling up the service due date X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 317) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or
Settings menu miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Introduction
The selected unit of measurement for
distance applies to:
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rodometer and the trip odometer
Rtrip computer
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
In the Sett menu, you have the following
menu
options:
Rcruise control
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RDISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 243)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 244) RASSYST PLUS service interval display

RChanging the vehicle settings Selecting the permanent display function

(Y page 245) You can determine whether the multifunction
RChanging the convenience settings display permanently shows your speed or the
(Y page 246) outside temperature.
RRestoring the factory settings
X Press the = or ; button on the
(Y page 247) steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.

Z
244 Menus and submenus

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Switching the daytime running lamps on/
On-board computer and displays

Permanent Display function. off

You will see the selected setting Outside i This function is not available in Canada.
Temperature or Additional X Press the = or ; button on the
Speedometer [km/h]/Additional
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Speedometer [mph].
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Lights submenu.
i The speed is displayed in km/h/mph X Press a to confirm.
according to the setting. X Press : or 9 to select the Day
Lights function.
Lights If the Day Lights function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the
Setting the brightness of the instrument
W symbol in the multifunction display
cluster lighting and switches
are shown in orange.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the Further information on daytime running
Brightness Display/Switches: function. lamps (Y page 135).
X Press the = or ; button on the
Setting the brightness of the ambient
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. lighting
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the
Lights submenu. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu.
Brightness Display/Switches: X Press a to confirm.
function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
You will see the selected setting.
Amb. Light +/-. function.
X Press a to confirm.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the X Press a to confirm.
brightness to any level from Level 1 to X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
Level 5 (bright).
brightness to any level from Off to Level
X Press the a or % button to save the
5 (bright).
setting. X Press the a or % button to save the
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
setting.
L, the brightness is dependent upon
the brightness of the ambient light. Setting the ambient lighting color
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster X Press the = or ; button on the

automatically controls the brightness of steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
the multifunction display. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
In daylight, the displays in the instrument Lights submenu.
cluster are not illuminated. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Ambient Light Color function.
 Menus and submenus 245

X Press a to confirm. 60 seconds after the engine is switched off.

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : or 9 button to set the If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,
color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. the exterior lighting goes off after
5 seconds.
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
Activating/deactivating surround switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
lighting and exterior lighting delayed following light up:
switch-off RParking lamps
X Press the = or ; button on the RLow-beam headlamps
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. RDaytime running lamps
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RSide marker lamps
Lights submenu. RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Activating/deactivating the interior
Surround Lighting function. lighting delayed switch-off
If the Surround Lighting function is If you activate the Light. Delay function,
activated, the light cone and the area the interior lighting remains on for
around the vehicle are displayed in orange 20 seconds after you remove the key from the
in the multifunction display. ignition lock.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
exterior lighting temporarily:
Lights submenu.
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
X Press a to confirm.
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock. Light. Delay function.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is If the Light. Delay function has been
deactivated. switched on, the vehicle interior is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is display.
reactivated the next time you start the X Press the a button to save the setting.
engine.
If you have activated the Surround
Lighting function and the light switch is set Vehicle
to Ã, the following functions are activated Activating/deactivating the automatic
when it is dark: door locking mechanism
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
X Press the = or ; button on the
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
the surround lighting is switched off and
automatic headlamp mode is activated submenu.
(Y page 135). X Press a to confirm.
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for

Z
246 Menus and submenus

X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. If somebody becomes trapped:

On-board computer and displays

Door Locks function. Rpress one of the memory function position

When the Auto. Door Locks function is buttons, or
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
in orange in the multifunction display.
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
X Press the a button to save the setting.
in which the steering wheel is moving.
If you activate the Auto. Door Locks The adjustment process is stopped.
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). X Press the = or ; button on the
For further information on the automatic steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
locking feature, see (Y page 89). X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
X Press a to confirm.
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, X Press the : or 9 button to select the

an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the Easy Entry/Exit function.
vehicle. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
X Press the = or ; button on the
activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
display.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
X Press the a button to save the setting.
submenu.
X Press a to confirm. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 126).
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function. Switching the belt adjustment on/off
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, X Press the = or ; button on the
the & symbol in the multifunction steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
display lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
Convenience X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Activating/deactivating the EASY- Belt Adjustment function.

ENTRY/EXIT feature If the Belt Adjustment function is
activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in
G WARNING orange in the multifunction display.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts X Press the a button to save the setting.
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could For further information on belt adjustment,
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. see (Y page 60).
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Switching the fold-in mirrors with the
making adjustments, make sure that no one locking feature on/off
has any body parts in the sweep of the This function is only available on vehicles with
steering wheel. the memory function (Y page 130).
This function is only available in Canada.
 Menus and submenus 247

When you activate the Auto. Mirror X Press a to confirm.

On-board computer and displays

Folding function, the exterior mirrors are The Reset All Settings? message
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you appears.
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the X Press the : or 9 button to select
exterior mirrors fold out again. No or Yes.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press a to confirm the selection.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
X Press the : or 9 button to select the display shows a confirmation message.
Convenience submenu. For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
X Press a to confirm. Lights function in the Lights submenu is
X Press the : or 9 button to select the only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior
mirrors will not fold out automatically
(Y page 128).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :.

Restoring the factory settings

X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.

Z
248 Display messages

Display messages
On-board computer and displays

Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 201)
RParking (Y page 182)

Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
 Display messages 249

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and
Currently hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Unavailable See
BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST and
Operator's Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST and
Operator's Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
Z
250 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST and
Operator's Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 251

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
÷ to a malfunction.
Inoperative See BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST and
Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake.
only)
Please Release
Parking Brake

$(USA A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or

DISTRONIC PLUS is active.
only)J(Canada A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock
only) the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
Brake Immediately You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message
disappears.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
You can restart the engine.

Z
252 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Brake Pad
Wear

G One or more main features of the mbrace system are

malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages 253

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISION
Functions PREVENTION ASSIST is temporarily not operational.
Currently Limited Possible causes are:
See Operator's Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Manual
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 323).
X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISION

Functions Limited PREVENTION ASSIST is not available due to a malfunction. BAS
See Operator's PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

A G Risk of injury
Malfunction Cabriolet: the roll bars are defective.
Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
SRS Malfunction cluster.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).

Z
254 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left
Malfunction G WARNING
Service The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
Required or Front triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Right Malfunction be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G WARNING
Rear Left The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
Malfunction triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Service Required be triggered.
or Rear Right There is an increased risk of injury.
Malfunction SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
Service Required warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet).
Left Side Curtain The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service G WARNING
Required or Right The left or right window curtain air bag (Coupe) or head bag
Side Curtain (Cabriolet) may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event
Airbag Malfunction of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 255

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Ran adult
Manual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 50).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z
256 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 50).

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
Manual system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied

The system may detect objects or forces applying additional

weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 50).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
 Display messages 257

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 50).

Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left
Cornering Light or
Check Right
Cornering Light

b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal

Z
258 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn SignalorCheck
Right Mirror Turn
Signal

b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Center Brake
Lamp

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Tail
and Brake
LampsorCheck Right
Tail and Brake
Lamps

b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left High
(Y page 143).
BeamorCheck Right
High Beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left License
Plate LamporCheck
Right License
Plate Lamp

b The rear fog lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Fog Lamp
 Display messages 259

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Parking
LamporCheck Front
Right Parking Lamp

b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left reverse
LamporCheck Right
Reverse Lamp

b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Sidemarker
LamporCheck Front
Right Sidemarker
Lamp

b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker
LamporCheck Rear
Right Sidemarker
Lamp

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Daytime
Running
LightorCheck Right
Daytime Running
Light

b The active light function is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative

b The exterior lighting is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual

Z
260 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The light sensor is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 315).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
 Display messages 261

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Z
262 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 313).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
 Display messages 263

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
Inoperative

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 201).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 201).

Z
264 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ManualorActive
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
Operator's Manual message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
InoperativeorActiv
e Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
 Display messages 265

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe sensors are dirty.
Operator's Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
ManualorActive
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Blind Spot Assist
Currently range.
Unavailable See Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Clean the sensors (Y page 323).
X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
InoperativeorActiv The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
e Blind Spot mirrors.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
Canceled fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 207).

Z
266 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
Inoperative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 207).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 191).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 191).
 Display messages 267

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Currently DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is also temporarily inoperative.
Unavailable See Possible causes are:
Operator's Manual
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 323).
X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
RDISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist

A warning tone also sounds.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Passive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 191).

Z
268 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DTR+: Steering DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Assist. Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: Steering DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is faulty.

Assist. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 189).
 Display messages 269

Tires

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Tire Pressure Soon loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 328).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 352).

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 352).

Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Rectify The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 355).

Z
270 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 328).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 328).
 Display messages 271

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.

TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Apply Brake You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.

Risk of Vehicle The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
Rolling Away or D.
Vehicle Not in 'P' A warning tone also sounds.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

Z
272 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift The vehicle is moving.

to 'P' when X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Vehicle is attention to road and traffic conditions.
Stationary X Shift the transmission to position P.

N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.

_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or

right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
Rear Left Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
not Latched or Rear
Right Backrest not
Latched

_ The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A

warning tone also sounds.
Lock Seat Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Front Left or Lock
Seat Backrest
Front Right
 Display messages 273

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

J Cabriolet: the trunk partition is open.
X Close the trunk partition (Y page 106).
Trunk Partition
Open

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering
Malfunction See G WARNING
Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

K If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot
open or close the soft top.
Convertible Top X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 100).
Operation possible
to 25 mph

K The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are
depressurized.
Convertible Top X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 100).
Opening/Closing
Not Finished

K The roof is not locked.

If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot
Open/Close open or close the soft top.
Convertible Top
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Completely
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Push or pull the soft-top switch until the soft top is fully open or
closed (Y page 100).

K The on-board voltage is too low.

X Start the engine.
Start Engine See
Operator's Manual

Z
274 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.
The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safety
reasons.
You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 100).

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 315).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

 You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle

 The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition

 The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Obtain a New Key

 The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 85).
Replace Key Battery

 The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and

is only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
 Display messages 275

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

 The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display
message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Vehicle

 The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A
Remove 'Start' warning tone also sounds.
Button and Insert
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
Key
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

 At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle

Z
276 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Safety
Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59).
warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You
The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven
warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59).
audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
sounds. ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving

faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than
15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 277

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake applied.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake system The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
$ (USA only) G WARNING
J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking
The red brake system characteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
running. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.

Z
278 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a

The yellow ABS warning malfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS,
lamp is lit while the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP® (Electronic Stability
engine is running. Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and
hill start assist are also deactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 279

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®,
lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
engine is running. A example, are also unavailable.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD,
÷å! PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start
assist, for example, are also unavailable.
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP® ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
and ESP® OFF warning G WARNING
lamps and the yellow
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
ABS warning lamp are
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lit while the engine is
lock if you brake hard, for example.
running.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
280 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
motion. necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 74).

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 74).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Drive on carefully.
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 281

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,
The yellow ESP® and PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start
ESP® OFF warning assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

The red SRS warning System).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).

Z
282 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Engine
On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
Check Engine warning workshop.
lamp may light up.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 283

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
warning lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
while the engine is malfunctioning.
running. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 315).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is G WARNING
running. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

Z
284 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 315).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance selected.
warning lamp lights up X Increase the distance.
while the vehicle is in
motion.
· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance of travel at too high a speed.
warning lamp lights up X Be prepared to brake immediately.
while the vehicle is in X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
motion. A warning tone brake or take evasive action.
also sounds.
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76).
For further information on the distance warning function of
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST: (Y page 71).
 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 285

Tires

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 328).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
286
 287

Useful information ............................ 288

Stowage areas .................................. 288
Features ............................................. 293

Stowage and features

288 Stowage areas

Useful information The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
i This Operator's Manual describes all the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
models and all standard and optional you should observe the following notes when
equipment of your vehicle available at the transporting a load:
time of publication of the Operator's RNever exceed the maximum permissible
Manual. Country-specific differences are gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
possible. Please note that your vehicle may weight rating of the vehicle (including
not be equipped with all features occupants). The values are specified on the
Stowage and features

described. This also applies to safety- vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of
related systems and functions. the driver's door.
i Read the information on qualified RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry

specialist workshops: (Y page 25). objects.

RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the trunk as
Stowage areas possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
Loading guidelines
upper edge of the seat backrests.
G WARNING RAlways place the load against the rear or
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or front seat backrests. Make sure that the
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip seat backrests are securely locked into
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle place.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
particularly in the event of sudden braking or seats if possible.
a sudden change in direction. RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
Always store objects so that they cannot be nets to transport loads and luggage.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
loads against slipping or tipping before the materials appropriate for the weight and
journey. size of the load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
G WARNING wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust for protection.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, Stowage space
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning. Important safety notes
Always switch off the engine before opening
G WARNING
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when
braking or abruptly changing directions.
 Stowage areas 289

RAlways store objects so that they cannot be X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
flung around in these or in similar lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
situations. 2.
RAlways make sure that objects do not X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
protrude from stowage compartments, the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
parcel nets or stowage nets. to position 1.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving. Stowage compartment in the center
RStow and secure objects that are heavy, console

Stowage and features

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 288).

Glove box

X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the

arrow.
Cover : swings upwards.

Stowage compartment under the

armrest
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 160).

XTo open: press left-hand button ; or right-

hand button :.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Coupe: instead of a soft top switch, an
additional stowage compartment can be
found in front of the armrest.
The glove box can only be locked and i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
unlocked using the mechanical key. USB connection and an AUX IN connection
Z
290 Stowage areas

or a Media Interface are installed in the Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 288)
stowage compartment. A Media Interface and the safety notes regarding stowage
is a universal interface for mobile audio spaces (Y page 288).
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
(see the separate COMAND Operating
Instructions). Through-loading facility in the rear

Stowage compartment under the front

seats
Stowage and features

G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the
stowage compartment, the cover may not be
able to restrain the items. Items may be
thrown out of the stowage compartment and
hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction. X Fold down rear seat armrest =.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load X Pull handle : and fold cover ;
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
downwards.
secure heavy objects in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 288).
The maximum permissible load of the
stowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
Through-loading facility in the rear
bench seat (Coupe)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
X To open: pull handle : up and fold
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
cover ; forwards. seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
Stowage nets RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be

Stowage nets are located in the front- restrained by the seat backrest.
passenger footwell and on the left-hand side There is an increased risk of injury.
of the trunk (Coupe) or left and right-hand Before every trip, make sure that the seat
sides of the trunk (Cabriolet). backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
 Stowage areas 291

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 288). Folding the seat backrest back
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat ! Make sure that the seat belt does not
backrests can be folded down separately to become trapped when folding the rear seat
increase the trunk capacity. backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
Folding the seat backrest forward

Stowage and features

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
i Vehicles with memory function: when you forward if necessary.
fold one or both parts of the rear seat X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
backrest forwards, the respective front engages.
seat moves forward slightly, when If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
necessary, in order to avoid contact. locked, this will be shown in the
X Vehicles without memory function: if multifunction display in the instrument
necessary, move the driver's or front- cluster. A warning tone also sounds.
passenger seat forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
X Open the trunk. back if necessary.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat
i You should always engage the rear seat
backrest release handle :.
backrests if you do not need the through-
The corresponding rear seat backrest is loading feature. This will prevent
released. unauthorized access to the trunk from the
vehicle interior.

Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. (Y page 288).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down

back if necessary. rings.

Z
292 Stowage areas

RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down

rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage and features

Trunk
: Bag hook

Stowage well under the trunk floor

! Unhook the handle before again before
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely
to prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

Example: Coupe
There are four cargo tie down rings in the
trunk on the Coupe and two cargo tie down
rings in the trunk sill on the Cabriolet.
X Coupe: fold up cargo tie down rings : next
to the rear seat backrest and push them
through the slits in the carpet.

Bag hook The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment.
G WARNING
X To open: pull handle : up.
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of
luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load

of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
Example: Coupe
 Features 293

X Coupe: hook handle : into rain Attaching the roof carrier

trough ;.
X Cabriolet: pull the trunk floor slightly
towards you and then hook handle : into
rain trough ;.

Roof carrier (Coupe)

Stowage and features

Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity Vehicles with a steel roof
of the vehicle rises and the driving
characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/
This helps to prevent damage to the sliding panel
vehicle. X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
Position the load on the roof rack in such a the arrow.
way that the vehicle will not sustain X Fold covers : upwards.
damage even when it is in motion. X Only secure the roof carrier to the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, anchorage points under covers :.
ensure that when the roof carrier is
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
installed you can:
instructions.
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel fully
Ropen the trunk lid fully Features
! To avoid damaging or scratching the Cup holder
covers, do not use metallic or hard objects
to open them. Important safety notes
The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg). ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof the right size and which have lids. The
load may become detached from the vehicle. drinks could otherwise spill.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
instructions.

Z
294 Features

Cup holder in the front-compartment X To open (Cabriolet): slide front cup holder
center console cover ; and rear cup holder cover : in
the direction of the arrows.

Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
Stowage and features

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded

up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
: Cup holder
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat while driving.
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
water only.

Cup holder in the rear stowage box

Example: Coupe
: Mirror light
; Bracket
Coupe (double cup holder, side by side) = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
X To open (Coupe): slide cover : forwards. ? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor

is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.
Cabriolet (double cup holder, in line) X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
 Features 295

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 165).
X To extend or retract: briefly press
button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.

Stowage and features

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of
the arrow. Ashtray
Front ashtray
Rear window roller sunblind (Coupe) ! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
Important safety notes cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
G WARNING
the stowage space could be damaged.
When extending or retracting, parts of the
body could become trapped within the sweep
of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.
When extending or retracting, make sure that
no one has any parts of the body within the
sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone
becomes trapped, briefly press the button
again. The opening or closing procedure will
be stopped.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can

move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
X To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 289).
X To remove the insert: grip recesses ;
Extending/retracting the roller
sunblind and lift insert = up and out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
X To close: press stowage compartment
cover : down until it engages.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and
use the resulting compartment for
stowage.

Z
296 Features

Rear-compartment ashtray
Stowage and features

Your attention must always be focused on the

traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
lighter when road and traffic conditions
X To remove the insert: press release permit.
button = and lift the insert up and out. X To open: open the stowage compartment
X To install the insert: install insert : from (Y page 289).
above into the holder and press down into X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
the holder until it engages. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
Cigarette lighter X To close: press stowage compartment
G WARNING cover : down until it engages.
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter. 12 V sockets
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
General notes
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
ignition lock (Y page 165).
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Accessories include such items as lamps or
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is chargers for mobile phones.
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
 Features 297

Socket in the rear-compartment center The system is available if:

console Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle on

Stowage and features

a map is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
X Lift up the cover of socket :. The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed
mbrace as follows:
X Press the W or X button on the
General notes multifunction steering wheel.
You must have a license agreement to or
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that X Use the volume controller of the audio
your system is activated and operational. To system/COMAND.
log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If
The system offers various services, e.g:
any of the steps mentioned are not carried
out, the system may not be activated. RAutomatic and manual emergency call
If you have questions about the activation, RRoadside Assistance call
contact one of the following telephone RMB Info call
hotlines: USA only: you can find information and a
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance description of all available features under
Center at "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007 System self-test
RCanada: Customer Service at
After you have switched on the ignition, the
1-888-923-8367 system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Shortly after successfully registering with the A malfunction in the system has been
service, a user ID and password will be sent detected if one of the following occurs:
to you by post.
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
USA only: you can use this password to log
not come on during the system self-test.
onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
at http://www.mbusa.com.
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.

Z
298 Features

RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
button does not light up during self- similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
diagnosis of the system. so. Move to a safe location along with other
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
following buttons continues to light up red the vehicle in accordance with national
after the system self-diagnosis: regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
- SOS button
You must have a license agreement to
- F Roadside Assistance call button
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that
- ï MB Info call button
Stowage and features

your system is activated and operational. To

RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the register, press the ï MB Info call button.
Inoperative or Service Not If any of the steps mentioned are not carried
Activated message appears in the out, the system may not be activated.
multifunction display. If you have questions about the activation,
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined contact one of the following telephone
above, the system may not operate as hotlines:
expected. In the event of an emergency, help RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
will have to be summoned by other means. Center at
Have the system checked at the nearest 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact or 1-866-990-9007
the following service hotlines: RCanada: Customer Service at
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance 1-888-923-8367
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) General notes
or 1-866-990-9007 An emergency call is dialed automatically if
RCanada: Customer Service at an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
1-888-923-8367 triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically
Emergency call triggered emergency call yourself.

Important safety notes An emergency call can also be initiated

manually.
G WARNING As soon as the emergency call has been
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an flashes. The multifunction display shows the
emergency if: Connecting Call message.
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the The audio output is muted.
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an Once the connection has been made, the
accident Call Connected message appears in the
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of multifunction display.
road All important information on the emergency
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be is transmitted, for example:
seen by other road users, particularly when RCurrent location of the vehicle (as
dark or in poor visibility conditions
determined by the GPS system)
There is a risk of an accident and injury. RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
 Features 299

Shortly after the emergency call has been i If the mobile phone network is
initiated, a voice connection is automatically unavailable, mbrace will not be able to
established between the Customer make the emergency call. If you leave the
Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the button, you will not know whether mbrace
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance placed the emergency call. In this case,
Center attempts to get more information always summon assistance by other
on the emergency. means.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle

Stowage and features

occupants, an ambulance is immediately Roadside Assistance button
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
X Press Roadside Assistance button :.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
Making an emergency call The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message. The audio
output is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
X To initiate an emergency call
manually: press cover : briefly to open. RCurrent location of the vehicle
X Press SOS button ; briefly. RVehicle identification number
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; i The COMAND display indicates that a call
flashes until the emergency call is is active. During the call, you can change to
concluded. the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
X Wait for a voice connection to the button on COMAND, for example.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Voice output is not available.
Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.

Z
300 Features

A voice connection is established between MB Info call button

the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of
the problem (Y page 303).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Stowage and features

Benz technician or makes arrangements for

your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as X Press MB Info call button :.
repair work and/or towing. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Further details are available in your mbrace Customer Assistance Center.
manual. The indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : flashes while the connection is
i The system has not been able to initiate
a roadside assistance call, if: being made. The multifunction display
shows the Connecting Call message.
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside The audio system is muted.
Assistance call button : is flashing
If a connection can be made, the Call
continuously.
Connected message appears in the
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
multifunction display.
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
established.
are available, the system transfers data to the
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
network is not available, for example. for example:
The Call Failed message appears in the RCurrent location of the vehicle
multifunction display.
RVehicle identification number
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel. i The COMAND display indicates that a call
or is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
X Press the corresponding button for ending button on COMAND, for example.
a phone call on COMAND.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other
products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
 Features 301

i The system has not been able to initiate Downloading destinations in COMAND
an MB Info call, if:
Downloading destinations
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
Destination Download gives you access to a
button : is flashing continuously.
data bank with over 15 million Points of
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
Benz Customer Assistance Center was the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
established. know the destination, the address can be
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
network is not available, for example.

Stowage and features

location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
The Call Failed message appears in the important destinations in the vicinity.
multifunction display. Furthermore, you can download routes with
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the up to 20 way points.
multifunction steering wheel. You are prompted to confirm route guidance
or to the address entered.
X Press the corresponding button for ending The system calculates the route and
a phone call on COMAND. subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
Call priority i If you select No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency i The destination download function is
call can still be initiated. In this case, an available if the relevant mobile phone
emergency call will take priority and override network is available and data transfer is
all other active calls. possible.
The indicator lamp of the respective button i The destination download function can
flashes until the call is ended. only be used if the vehicle is equipped with
An emergency call can only be terminated by a navigation system.
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center. Route Assistance
All other calls can be ended by pressing: This service is part of the mbrace PLUS
Package and cannot be purchased
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction separately.
steering wheel
Ror the corresponding COMAND button for
i You can also use the Route Assistance
function if your vehicle is not equipped with
ending a telephone call
a navigation system.
i When a call is initiated, the audio system Within the framework of this service, you
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer receive a professional and reliable form of
connected to COMAND. However, if you navigation support without having to leave
want to use your mobile phone, do so only your vehicle.
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
The customer service representative finds a
location.
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the
current route section.

Z
302 Features

Search & Send A display message appears, asking

whether navigation should be started.
General notes X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle XVY the COMAND controller and press
must be equipped with mbrace and a W to confirm.
navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace The system calculates the route and
service subscription must be completed. subsequently starts the route guidance
"Search & Send" is a destination entry with the address entered.
service. A destination address which is found
Stowage and features

on Google Maps® can be transferred via i If you select No, the address can be saved
mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation in the address book.
system. i If you have sent more than one
destination address, each individual
Specifying and sending the destination
destination must be confirmed separately.
address
X Go to the website http:// i Destination addresses are loaded in the
www.maps.google.com and enter a same order as the order in which they were
destination address into the entry field. sent.
X To send the destination address to the If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz
e-mail address of your mbrace vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace
account: click on the corresponding accounts:
button on the website. If multiple vehicles are registered under the
i Example: same e-mail address, the destination will
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then be sent to all the vehicles.
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle. Vehicle remote opening
X When the "Send" dialog window appears: You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
Enter the e-mail address you specified have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
when setting up your mbrace account into a replacement SmartKey is not available.
the corresponding field. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
X Click "Send". Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
i Information on specific commands such remotely within four days of the ignition being
as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found turned off. After this time, the remote
on the website. unlocking may be delayed by 15 to
60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no
Calling up destination addresses
longer be opened remotely.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
The destination address is loaded into the
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
vehicle's navigation system.
Assistance Center at
 Features 303

1-800-FOR-MERCedes USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 locked via:
RCanada: Customer Service at Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
1-888-923-8367 section
You will be asked for your password. Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed Blackberry)
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer To do this, you will need your identification
Assistance Center. number and password.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be

Stowage and features

i The vehicle remote closing feature is
opened via:
available when the relevant mobile phone
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" network is available and data connection is
section possible.
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry) Stolen vehicle recovery service
To do this, you will need your identification If your vehicle has been stolen:
number and password.
X Notify the police.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if The police will issue a numbered incident
the corresponding mobile phone network report.
is accessible. X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Vehicle remote closing Center together with your PIN.
The remote closing feature can be used when The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you Center then tries to locate the system. The
are no longer nearby. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
The vehicle can then be locked by the Center contacts you and the local law
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. enforcement agency if the vehicle is
located.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being However, only the law enforcement agency
turned off. After this time, the remote closing is informed of the location of the vehicle.
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-
remotely. Benz Customer Assistance Center is
X Contact the following service hotlines: automatically informed.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
With the vehicle remote malfunction
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the
RCanada: Customer Service at
Customer Assistance center can provide
1-888-923-8367 improved support for problems with your
You will be asked for your password. vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data
The next time you are inside the vehicle and is transferred to the Customer Assistance
you switch on the ignition, the Doors center. The customer service representative
Locked Remotely message appears in the can use the received data to decide what kind
multifunction display. of assistance is required. You are then, for
Z
304 Features

example, guided to the nearest authorized Depending on what the customer service
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle representative agreed with you, the voice
is called. connection is re-established after the transfer
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during is complete. If necessary, you will be
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, contacted at a later time by another means,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance e.g. by e-mail or phone.
center. You will see the Roadside Further functions of the vehicle remote
Assistance Connected message in the malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
Stowage and features

malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Assistance center. If a service is overdue,

Request for vehicle diagnosis the COMAND display shows a message
received. Start vehicle diagnosis? about various special offers at your
message appears in the display. workshop.
X Confirm the message with Yes. Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
start ignition message appears, turn etc. If applicable, you will receive
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition information on special offers in the e-mail.
lock (Y page 165). USA only: this information can also be
X When the Please follow the called up under "Owners Online" at http://
instructions received by phone and www.mbusa.com.
move your vehicle to a safe Information on the data stored in the vehicle
position. message appears, follow the (Y page 27).
customer service representative's Information on Roadside Assistance
instructions. (Y page 23).
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote Downloading routes
malfunction diagnosis is canceled
completely. Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
The vehicle operating state check begins.
system. To do this, an SD memory card must
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
activated. message.
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
When the diagnosis is completed, the Send the card into the card slot on the COMAND
vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice system before saving.
connection may be//interrupted A route can be prepared and sent either by a
during data transfer) message appears. customer service representative or via the
The vehicle data can now be sent to the mbrace portal on the Internet.
Customer Assistance center.
Each route can include up to 20 way points.
X Press OK to confirm the message. Once a route has been received by the
The voice connection with the Customer navigation system, you will see the <route
Assistance center is terminated. name> has been saved to memory card.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: Do you want to start route
Transferring data... message. guidance? message in the COMAND display.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer The route is saved to the SD memory card.
Assistance center.
 Features 305

XTo start route guidance: select Yes. You can specify up to ten areas
An overview of the route is shown in the simultaneously. Different settings are
display. possible for each area.
i If you select No, the saved route can be USA only: these settings can be called up
called up later via the navigation menu. under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
X Select Start.
Route guidance is started. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service
i Downloaded and saved data can be called representative that you wish to activate geo

Stowage and features

up again in COMAND. fencing.
You can find further information in the Currently inactive areas can be activated by
separate COMAND Operating Instructions. text message.

Speed alert Triggering the vehicle alarm

You can define the upper speed limit, which With this function, you can trigger the
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An
If this selected speed is exceeded by the alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
vehicle, a message will be sent to the flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic
Customer Assistance center. The Customer alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,
Assistance center then forwards this the alarm switches off.
information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options Garage door opener
include text message, e-mail or an automated Important safety notes
call.
The data you receive contains the following G WARNING
information: When you operate or program the garage door
Rthe location where the speed limit was with the integrated garage door opener,
exceeded persons in the range of movement of the
garage door can become trapped or struck by
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
exceeded
When using the integrated garage door
Rthe selected speed limit which was
opener, always make sure that nobody is
exceeded
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which G WARNING
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
be informed if the vehicle crosses the gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
boundaries of the selected areas. You can these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
select the way in which you receive this is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
information beforehand. Possible options the engine running in enclosed spaces
include text message, e-mail or an automated without sufficient ventilation.
call.
The area can be determined as either a circle The HomeLink® garage door opener
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
Z
306 Features

to operate up to three different door and gate

systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that:
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Stowage and features

i Certain garage door drives are

incompatible with the integrated garage Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
door opener. If you have difficulty mirror
programming the integrated garage door
Garage door remote control A is not part of
opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
the integrated garage door opener.
Benz Center.
X The first time before programming, clear
Alternatively, you can call the following
telephone assistance services: the integrated garage door opener memory
(Y page 308).
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
Assistance Center at
ignition lock.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
RCanada: Customer Service at
the integrated garage door opener.
1-800-387-0100
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
up yellow.
(free of charge)
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
More information on HomeLink® and/or as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
compatible products is also available
the first time. If the selected button has
online at http://www.homelink.com.
already been programmed, indicator
i Notes on the declaration of conformity lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
(Y page 25). seconds have elapsed.
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 lamp : flashes yellow.
X Point garage door remote control A
Programming
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
Programming buttons mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to
Observe the "Important safety notes" 20 cm).
(Y page 305). i The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be
necessary. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
 Features 307

X Press and hold button B on remote control Notes on programming the remote
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. control
If indicator lamp : lights up green or Canadian radio frequency laws require a
flashes, then programming has been "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
successful. signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
X Release button B on remote control A for Therefore, these signals may not last long
the garage door drive system. enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
programming. Comparable with Canadian
the programming procedure for the

Stowage and features

law, some U.S. garage door openers also
corresponding button on the rear-view feature a "break".
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
Proceed as follows:
between remote control A and the rear-
view mirror. Rif you live in Canada
Rif you have difficulties programming the
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after garage door opener (regardless of where
successful programming, the garage door you live) when using the programming
system is using a rolling code. After steps
programming, you must synchronize the
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
view mirror with the receiver of the garage the integrated garage door opener.
door system. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
Synchronizing the rolling code X Release the button.
Observe the "Important safety notes" Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
(Y page 305). X Press button B of garage door remote
Your vehicle must be within reach of the control A for two seconds, then release it
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure for two seconds.
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
X Press button B again for two seconds.
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate. X Repeat this sequence on button B of

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the remote control A until indicator lamp :
ignition lock. lights up green.
X Press the program button of the door or
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
gate drive (see the door or gate drive process.
operating instructions, e.g. under X Continue with the other programming
"programming of additional remote steps (see above).
controls").
Problems when programming
i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
initiate the next step. If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door
X Press previously programmed button ;, opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
= or ? of the integrated garage door the following instructions:
opener until the door closes. RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
The rolling code synchronization is then
door drive remote control A. This can
complete.
usually be found on the back of the remote
control.

Z
308 Features

The integrated garage door opener is Garage door system with a rolling code:
compatible with devices that have units indicator lamp : flashes green.
which operate in the frequency range of i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
280to 433MHz. long as the button is pressed. The
RReplace the batteries in garage door transmission is halted after a maximum of
remote control A. This increases the ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
likelihood that garage door remote control up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
A will transmit a strong and precise signal if necessary.
to the integrated garage door opener in the
Stowage and features

rear-view mirror. Clearing the memory

RWhen programming, hold remote control
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
A at varying distances and angles from the
ignition lock.
button that you are programming. Try
X Press buttons ; and ?.
various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
but at varying distances. X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
RIf another remote control for the same indicator lamp turns green.
garage door drive is available, repeat the
i Make sure that you clear the memory of
same programming steps with this remote
the integrated garage door opener before
control. Before performing these steps,
selling the vehicle.
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote
control A.
Floormats
RNote that some remote controls only
transmit for a limited amount of time (the G WARNING
indicator lamp on the remote control goes Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
out). Press button B on remote control pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
A again before transmission ends. The operating and road safety of the vehicle
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
opener unit. This can improve signal Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
reception/transmission. stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
Opening/closing the garage door securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
After it has been programmed, the integrated loose floormats and do not place floormats on
garage door opener performs the function of top of one another.
the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code:
indicator lamp : lights up green.
 Features 309

Stowage and features

X Slide the seat backwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

Z
310
 311

Useful information ............................ 312

Engine compartment ........................ 312
Maintenance ...................................... 316
Care .................................................... 317

Maintenance and care

312 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
equipment of your vehicle available at the again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
time of publication of the Operator's is a risk of injury.
Manual. Country-specific differences are If you need to do any work inside the engine
possible. Please note that your vehicle may compartment,
not be equipped with all features
Rswitch off the ignition
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
Maintenance and care

i Read the information on qualified such as the fan rotation area

specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Rkeep clothing away from moving parts

Engine compartment G WARNING

The ignition system and the fuel injection
Hood system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
Important safety notes could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
G WARNING injury.
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when Never touch components of the ignition
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. system or fuel injection system when the
There is a risk of an accident. ignition is switched on.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
Certain components in the engine
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
a risk of injury to persons within range of
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
movement of the hood.
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
Open and close the hood only when no one is poses a risk of injury.
within its range of movement.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
G WARNING
following.
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
G WARNING
engine compartment could expose you to hot
When the hood is open and the windshield
gases or other service products. There is a
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
risk of injury.
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
the ignition before opening the hood.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
 Engine compartment 313

could otherwise damage the windshield Engine oil

wipers or the hood.
General notes
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.

Maintenance and care

When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off. Rthe engine should be switched off for
X Pull release lever : on the hood. approximately five minutes if the engine is
The hood is released. at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil

dipstick
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch very hot. Working in the engine compartment
handle ; up and lift the hood. poses a risk of injury.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in Where possible, let the engine cool down and
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open touch only the components described in the
automatically by the gas-filled strut. following.

Closing the hood

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 inches (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.

Z
314 Engine compartment

H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
Maintenance and care

tube.
center.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
caused by the following:
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
If the level is between MIN mark = and
not been specifically approved for the
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
service system
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
= or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) engine the interval for replacement specified by
oil. the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
Adding engine oil
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
G WARNING engine oil can result in damage to the
Certain components in the engine engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
compartment, such as the engine, radiator excess engine oil siphoned off.
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Example: engine oil cap
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
it.
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
X Add engine oil.
components before starting the engine.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
 Engine compartment 315

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn Only check the coolant level when the
clockwise. vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
Ensure that the cap locks into place has cooled down.
securely. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X Check the oil level again with the oil ignition lock (Y page 165).
dipstick (Y page 313). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 165).
Further information on engine oil
X Check the coolant temperature display in
(Y page 386).
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
Additional service products 158 ‡ (70 †).

Maintenance and care

X Turn the SmartKey to position
Checking coolant level 0 (Y page 165) in the ignition lock.
G WARNING X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-

Certain components in the engine clockwise to allow excess pressure to

compartment, such as the engine, radiator escape.
and parts of the exhaust system, can become X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
very hot. Working in the engine compartment remove it.
poses a risk of injury. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
Where possible, let the engine cool down and = in the filler neck when cold, there is
touch only the components described in the enough coolant in coolant expansion
following. tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
G WARNING (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel
The engine cooling system is pressurized, filler neck when warm, there is enough
particularly when the engine is warm. When coolant in expansion tank ;.
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot X If necessary, add coolant that has been
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Let the engine cool down before opening the X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
as it will go.
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape. For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 388).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

Z
316 Maintenance

G WARNING i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Windshield washer concentrate is highly does not show any information on the
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine components or the exhaust system it engine oil level (Y page 313).
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. The multifunction display shows a service
Make sure that no windshield washer message for several seconds, e.g.:
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. RService A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days

Depending on the operating conditions of the

vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
Maintenance and care

the next service due date is displayed.

The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
X Add the premixed washer fluid. does not take into account any periods of
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck time during which the battery is
until it engages. disconnected.
If the washer fluid level drops below the Maintaining the time-dependent service
recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message schedule:
appears in the multifunction display X Note down the service due date displayed
prompting you to add washer fluid in the multifunction display before
(Y page 274). disconnecting the battery.
Further information on windshield washer or
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 389).
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS Hiding a service message
Service messages X Press the a or % button on the
steering wheel.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
 Care 317

Displaying service messages Under these or similar conditions, have, for

example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
X Switch on the ignition.
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
X Press the = or ; button on the arduous operating conditions, the tires must
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. be checked more often. Further information
X Press the 9 or : button to select the can be obtained at a qualified specialist
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pressing the a button. Center.
The service due date appears in the
Driving abroad
multifunction display.
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can

Maintenance and care

Information about Service obtain further information from any
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval Care
display has been inadvertently reset, this
setting can be corrected at a qualified General notes
specialist workshop.
H Environmental note
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
otherwise lead to increased wear and cloths in an environmentally responsible
damage to the major assemblies or the manner.
vehicle.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an of the following:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset Rdry, rough or hard cloths
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Rabrasive cleaning agents
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on Rsolvents
maintenance work, for example. Rcleaning agents containing solvents

Special service requirements Do not scrub.

The specified maintenance interval takes only Do not touch the surfaces or protective
the normal operation of the vehicle into films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
account. Under arduous operating conditions scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
or increased load on the vehicle, damage the surfaces and protective film.
maintenance work must be carried out more ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
frequently, for example: period straight after cleaning it, particularly
Rregular city driving with frequent after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
intermediate stops cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel increased corrosion of the brake discs and
short distances brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
surfaces the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
The vehicle can then be parked.
periods

Z
318 Care

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for ! Make sure that:

retaining the quality in the long term. Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
Use care products and cleaning agents or soft top are fully closed.
recommended and approved by Mercedes- Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
Benz. (the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
0.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
Automatic car wash
make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise the
Maintenance and care

G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing vehicle could be damaged.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake Do not remove the SmartKey from the
carefully while paying attention to the traffic ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
conditions until full braking power is restored. door or front-passenger door when the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function automatic transmission selects park
is activated, the vehicle brakes position P automatically and locks the
automatically in certain situations. To wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate the automatic transmission to N
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in beforehand.
the following or other similar situations: RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Rwhen towing the vehicle Do not open the driver's door or front-
Rin the car wash passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
! Preferably use automatic car washes with transmission selects park position P
adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This automatically and locks the wheels.
corresponds with the specification for the
Cabriolet program. In car washes that use Observe the following to make sure that the
high water pressures, there is a risk that a automatic transmission stays in position N:
small amount of water may leak into the X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
vehicle. ignition is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
! Cabriolet: do not treat the vehicle with
hot wax under any circumstances. ignition lock (Y page 165).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
! Cabriolet: pull the SmartKey out of the Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
ignition lock when washing the vehicle. This X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
ensures that the wind deflector on the X Shift the automatic transmission to
windshield is retracted. The wind deflector
position N.
may otherwise be damaged.
X Release the brake pedal.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless X Release the parking brake.
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
 Care 319

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car tires or chassis components replaced
wash from the very start. immediately.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Always maintain a distance of at least
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off 11.8in (30cm) between the vehicle and the
wax from the windshield and the wiper power washer nozzle. Information about
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce the correct distance is available from the
wiping noises caused by residue on the equipment manufacturer.
windshield. Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following:

Maintenance and care

Rtires
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rdoor gaps, joints etc.
Observe the legal requirements in all Rsoft top (Cabriolet)
countries concerned. Rwind deflector net (Cabriolet)
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Relectrical components
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rbattery
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
Rconnectors
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
Rlights
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rseals
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
Rtrim elements
gentle jet of water.
Rventilation slots
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet. Damaged seals or electrical components
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
can lead to leaks or failures.
sponge frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
Cleaning the paintwork
thoroughly with a chamois. ! Do not affix:
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Rstickers
paintwork. Rfilms
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all Rmagnetic plates or similar items
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
soon as possible.
damage the paintwork.
Power washers Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by
G WARNING inadequate care cannot always be completely
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage specialist workshop.
to the tires or chassis components. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
Components damaged in this way may fail while avoiding rubbing too hard.
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. X Soak insect remains with insect remover
Do not use power washers with circular jet and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

Z
320 Care

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse Always have paintwork repairs performed
off the treated areas afterwards. at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or treatment under any circumstances.
lighter fluid.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint treatment.
surface, use the paint care products These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
recommended and approved by Mercedes- with a clear matte finish.
Maintenance and care

Benz. This is the case approximately every

three to five months, depending on the i The vehicle should preferably be washed
climate conditions and the care product used. by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and plenty of water.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
recommended and approved by Mercedes- from the range of recommended and
Benz should be used. approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to Cleaning the Cabriolet soft top
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
! Never use any of the following to clean the
soft top:
Matte finish care
Rgasoline
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy Rthinner
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
Rtar or stain remover
shine.
Rother organic solvents
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte ! Remove bird droppings immediately as
effect: they are corrosive and, therefore, can make
the soft-top fabric leak. Do not use high-
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable pressure cleaning equipment to clean the
materials. vehicle. Do not use sharp-edged equipment
RFrequent use of car washes.
to remove ice and snow.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Light soiling: you can clean the soft top
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or while it is dry or rinse it with clear water.
polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. X Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft
wax. These products are only suitable for top with a brush and clear water. Clean
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles stains and other dirt with a brush and soft
with matte finish leads to considerable top cleaning agents that have been
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. Always brush from front to back,
following the grain of the fabric.
 Care 321

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's

resistance to dirt.
To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the
soft top using soft top cleaning agents that
have been recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,
can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have
the soft-top seams sealed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Clean net ; of the wind deflector with a

Maintenance and care

i Cover the soft top appropriately if you soft brush or a moist cloth. For heavier
plan to leave the vehicle outside for a long soiling, clean it with the care and cleaning
period of time. agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz and rinse it with clean
Cleaning AIRCAP water.
Cleaning the wind deflector Cleaning the AIRCAP wind screen
! Do not use high-pressure cleaning Clean the AIRCAP wind screen with the soft
equipment to clean the net. top open.
Clean the wind deflector on the windshield X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the
with the soft top closed. SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
X Apply the parking brake firmly. (Y page 165).
X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the

SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Start/Stop button twice (Y page 165).
(Y page 165). X Open the soft top (Y page 100).

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the

Start/Stop button twice (Y page 165).
X Open the cover in the lower center console.
The AIRCAP button is under the cover.

X Press rear seat head restraints button :.

The rear seat head restraints and the
AIRCAP wind screen extend upwards.

X Press AIRCAP button :.

The wind deflector between the windshield
and the soft top is extended.

Z
322 Care

with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or

ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage
and damage to electronic components.
X Clean net ; of the AIRCAP wind screen X Clean the inside and outside of the
Maintenance and care

with a moist cloth and care and cleaning windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agents recommended and approved by product that is recommended and
Mercedes-Benz. approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wheels Cleaning wiper blades

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products G WARNING
to remove brake dust. This could damage You could become trapped by the windshield
wheel bolts and brake components. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
period straight after cleaning it, particularly injury.
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Always switch off the windshield wipers and
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
increased corrosion of the brake discs and wiper blades.
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the wiper blade could be damaged.
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
The vehicle can then be parked. do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
Cleaning the windows could cause wiper noise.
G WARNING ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
You could become trapped by the windshield back. The windshield could be damaged if
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
injury. the windshield.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or damp cloth.
wiper blades. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
 Care 323

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Maintenance and care

Mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn Cleaning the rear view camera
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning around the rear view camera with a power
cloths. washer.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment
manufacturer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open the cover of the rear view
camera: with COMAND activated, press
the W button.
X Select System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Rear View Camera and press W to
confirm.

Z
324 Care

X Select Open Camera Cover and press W Cleaning the exhaust pipes
to confirm. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
The cover of the 360° camera opens.
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
water and a soft cloth to clean camera
lens :. Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
Cleaning the 360° camera can restore the original shine of the exhaust
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
around the 360° camera with a power winter and after washing.
washer.360 X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
Maintenance and care

tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the cleaning agents
ignition lock. These may damage the display surface. Do
X To open the cover of the 360° camera: not put pressure on the display surface
with COMAND activated, press the W when cleaning. This could lead to
button. irreparable damage to the display.
X Select Syst. settings by turning cVd X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
the COMAND controller and press W to it is switched off and has cooled down.
confirm. X Clean the display surface using a
X Select 360° Camera and press W to commercially available microfiber cloth
confirm. and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
X Select Open Camera Cover and press W
to confirm. microfiber cloth.
The cover of the 360° camera opens.
X To clean the 360° camera: clean camera Cleaning the plastic trim
lens : with clean water and a soft cloth. G WARNING
i If you drive at speeds above 20 mph Care products and cleaning agents containing
(30 km/h) or the SmartKey is in position solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
360° camera closes automatically. come loose in the event of air bag
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
 Care 325

Do not use any care products and cleaning are chrome-plated or not, consult an
agents to clean the cockpit. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
! Do not affix the following to plastic a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
surfaces: cloth.
Rstickers X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Rfilms products recommended and approved by
Rscented oil bottles or similar items Mercedes-Benz.
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
Cleaning the seat covers
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent

Maintenance and care

or sunscreen to come into contact with the General notes
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
look of the surfaces. genuine leather, artificial leather or
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. damage the cover.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning
i Note that regular care is essential to
products recommended and approved by ensure that the appearance and comfort of
Mercedes-Benz. the covers is retained over time.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
selector lever example:
RDifferences in the texture
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been RSigns of stretching and marking
recommended and approved by Mercedes- RSlight nuances of color
Benz. These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ! To retain the natural appearance of the
elements
leather, observe the following cleaning
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents instructions:
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, RClean genuine leather covers carefully
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk with a damp cloth and then wipe the
of damaging the surface. covers down with a dry cloth.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. RMake sure that the leather does not
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are become soaked. It may otherwise
mostly made of anodized aluminum and become rough and cracked.
can lose their shine if chrome polish is ROnly use leather care agents that have
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead been tested and approved by Mercedes-
when cleaning the trim pieces. Benz. You can obtain these from a
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very qualified specialist workshop.
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces

Z
326 Care

Seat covers of other materials

! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
Maintenance and care

afterwards. Cleaning results depend on

the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
 327

Useful information ............................ 328

Where will I find...? ........................... 328
Flat tire .............................................. 328
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 330
Jump-starting .................................... 334
Towing and tow-starting .................. 336
Fuses .................................................. 339

Breakdown assistance
328 Flat tire

Useful information Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency

spare wheel
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 25).
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel (example)
Breakdown assistance

: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Where will I find...? ; Vehicle tool kit tray
= Stowage well
First-aid kit
X Open the trunk lid.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RCabriolet: straps for emergency release of
the soft top
Rfolding wheel chock
Rfuse allocation chart
Rjack
Ralignment bolt
Rone pair of gloves
Example: Coupe, first-aid kit
Rlug wrench
X Open the trunk lid. Rtowing eye
X Release tensioning strap :.
X Remove first-aid kit ;.
Flat tire
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid
kit at least once a year. Replace the Preparing the vehicle
contents if necessary, and replace missing Your vehicle may be equipped with:
items.
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 329)
Vehicle tool kit Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
General notes Ran emergency spare wheel(Y page 377)
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the Information on changing/mounting a wheel
stowage well under the trunk floor. (Y page 367).
 Flat tire 329

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and bearing capacity and the speed index
level ground, as far away as possible from (Y page 361).
traffic. MOExtended tires may only be used in
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away warning system or with an active tire pressure
(Y page 182). monitor.
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the If the pressure loss warning message
straight-ahead position. appears in the multifunction display:
X Switch off the engine. RObserve the instructions in the display
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove messages (Y page 269).
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. RCheck the tire for damage.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
driver's door. The maximum driving distance is

Breakdown assistance
The on-board electronics now have status approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having vehicle is partially laden and approximately
been removed. 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the laden.
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock In addition to the vehicle load, the driving
(Y page 165). distance possible depends upon:
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Rspeed
Make sure that they are not endangered as Rroad condition
they do so.
Routside temperature
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the may be reduced by extreme driving
wheel change should, for example, stand conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
behind the barrier. through a moderate style of driving.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to The maximum permissible distance which
traffic conditions when doing so. can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
X Close the driver's door.
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires:
General notes
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat Rmarked "MOExtended"
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
pressure in one or more tires. The affected replaced with a MOExtended tire, a
tire must not show any clearly visible damage. standard tire may be used as a temporary
measure. Make sure that you use the
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the proper size and type (summer or winter
MOExtended marking which appears on the tire).
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-
330 Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notes G WARNING

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when
lead to function restrictions applying to
cornering, accelerating quickly and when
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
braking. There is a risk of an accident.
system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, operating safety of your vehicle may be
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, restricted. You could lose control of the
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle, for example:
vehicle.
Rbraking
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
Ryou hear banging noises.
Breakdown assistance

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not

Rthe vehicle starts to shake. adapted to the road conditions
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. There is a risk of an accident.
RESP® is intervening constantly. In the event of a short circuit or a similar
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. incident, contact a qualified specialist
After driving in emergency mode, have the workshop immediately. Do not drive any
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist further. You should have all work involving the
workshop with regard to their further use. The battery carried out at a qualified specialist
defective tire must be replaced in every case. workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,

see (Y page 69) and (Y page 74).
Battery (vehicle)
G WARNING
Important safety notes
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
Special tools and expert knowledge are of sparks, which could ignite the highly
required when working on the battery, e.g. explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of
removal and installing. You should therefore an explosion.
have all work involving the battery carried out Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
at a qualified specialist workshop. body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when

charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
 Battery (vehicle) 331

Rif you push or pull the battery across the batteries to a qualified
carpet or other synthetic materials specialist workshop or a
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth special collection point for
used batteries.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit qualified specialist workshop.
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
Observe the service intervals in the
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
specialist workshop for more information.
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts. ! You should have all work involving the
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery carried out at a qualified specialist
battery. workshop. In the exceptional case that it is

Breakdown assistance
RIt is important that you observe the
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
described order of the battery terminals
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
when connecting and disconnecting a
battery. SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
battery poles with identical polarity are
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
connected.
electronic components, such as the
RIt is particularly important to observe the
alternator, may be damaged.
described order when connecting and Ryou first remove the negative terminal
disconnecting the jumper cables.
clamp and then the positive terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
terminals while the engine is running. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
G WARNING Rthe transmission is locked in position P
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. after disconnecting the battery. The
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. vehicle is secured against rolling away.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean You can then no longer move the vehicle.
over the battery. Keep children away from The battery and the cover of the positive
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with terminal clamp must be installed securely
water and seek medical attention. during operation.

H Environmental note Comply with safety precautions and take

protective measures when handling
Batteries contain dangerous
batteries.
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with Risk of explosion.
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the Fire, open flames and smoking are
environment. prohibited when handling the
Dispose of batteries in an battery. Avoid creating sparks.
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged

Z
332 Battery (vehicle)

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid consumers. The vehicle will then use very
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. little energy, thus conserving battery
Wear suitable protective clothing, power.
especially gloves, apron and i If the power supply has been interrupted,
faceguard. e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
Rinse any acid spills immediately have to:
with clear water. Contact a Rset the clock. Information on setting the
physician if necessary.
clock can be found in the separate
Wear eye protection. operating instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a
navigation system, the clock is set
Keep children away. automatically.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
Breakdown assistance

mirrors in/out automatically, by folding

Observe this Operator's Manual. the mirrors out once (Y page 128).

Charging the battery

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
G WARNING
recommends that you only use batteries
which have been tested and approved for During charging and jump-starting, explosive
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These gases can escape from the battery. There is a
batteries provide increased impact risk of an explosion.
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
suffering acid burns should the battery be sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
damaged in the event of an accident. ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
In order for the battery to achieve the Do not lean over a battery.
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged. G WARNING
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
discharge over time if you do not use the Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
vehicle. In this case, have the battery Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
disconnected at a qualified specialist over the battery. Keep children away from
workshop. You can also charge the battery batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
with a charger recommended by Mercedes- water and seek medical attention.
Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
for further information. G WARNING
Have the battery condition of charge checked A discharged battery can freeze at
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly temperatures below freezing point. When
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified battery, gases can escape from the battery.
specialist workshop if you wish to leave your There is a risk of an explosion.
vehicle parked for a long period of time. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
 Battery (vehicle) 333

! Only use battery chargers with a

maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 334).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 334).

Breakdown assistance
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jump-
start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-
out battery may be shorter. The starting
characteristics may be impaired, especially at
low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. A
battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information and availability. Read the battery
charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.

Z
334 Jump-starting

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Breakdown assistance

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
 Jump-starting 335

ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.

Breakdown assistance
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.

X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.

Z
336 Towing and tow-starting

X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

Breakdown assistance

is activated, the vehicle brakes

Important safety notes automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
the following or other similar situations:
no longer available if:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rthe engine is not running.
Rin the car wash
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
or the vehicle's electrical system. be damaged.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
force may be necessary to steer or brake. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
There is a risk of an accident. recover the vehicle with a crane.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, ! When towing, pull away slowly and
make sure that the steering moves freely. smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
G WARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
started is greater than the permissible gross This could damage the vehicle.
weight of your vehicle: ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
Rthe towing eye could detach itself SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
rollover. the ignition lock and shift the automatic
transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey
There is a risk of an accident.
back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
permissible gross weight of your vehicle. 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle If the vehicle has to be towed more than
weight rating can be found on the vehicle 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
identification plate (Y page 382). raised and transported.
 Towing and tow-starting 337

It is better to have the vehicle transported

than to have it towed.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it transported on a transporter
or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N

Breakdown assistance
i Disarm the automatic locking feature
before the vehicle is towed (Y page 89). You
could otherwise be locked out when
pushing or towing the vehicle.
Towing eye covers (example: Coupe)
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
Installing/removing the towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, behind the covers.
Installing the towing eye
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
G WARNING tool kit (Y page 328).
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
is a risk of burns when removing the rear direction of the arrow.
cover. X Take cover : off the opening.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular X Screw in and tighten the towing eye
care when removing the rear cover.
clockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eye

X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle

raised
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could
otherwise damage the brake system.

Z
338 Towing and tow-starting

Only possible for vehicles without The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
4MATIC. onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps purposes.
(Y page 138). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey X Shift the automatic transmission to
from the ignition lock. position N.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle applying the parking brake.
raised, it is important that you observe the X Shift the automatic transmission to
safety instructions (Y page 336).
position P.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
Breakdown assistance

Towing a vehicle with both axles on ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
the ground from the ignition lock.
X Secure the vehicle.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 336).
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 138). ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
i When towing with the hazard warning with either the front or the rear axle raised,
lamps switched on, use the combination as doing so will damage the transmission.
switch as usual to signal a change of If the vehicle has transmission damage or
direction. In this case, only the turn signals damage to the front or rear axle, have it
for the desired direction flash. After transported on a transporter or trailer.
resetting the combination switch, the In the event of damage to the electrical
hazard warning lamps start flashing again. system
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the If the battery is defective, the automatic
ignition lock. transmission will be locked in position P. To
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the shift the automatic transmission to position
brake pedal and keep it depressed. N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
X Shift the automatic transmission to
electrical system in the same way as when
position N. jump-starting (Y page 334).
X Release the brake pedal.
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
X Release the parking brake.

Tow-starting (emergency engine

Transporting the vehicle starting)
! You may only secure the vehicle by the ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as must not be started by tow-starting. This
axle or steering components. Otherwise, could otherwise damage the transmission.
the vehicle could be damaged.
 Fuses 339

You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
under (Y page 334). ignition lock and remove it (Y page 165).
or
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
Fuses the ignition is switched off (Y page 165).
Important safety notes All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
G WARNING
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher RFuse box on the driver's side of the
amperage, the electric cables could be dashboard
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
is a risk of an accident and injury. left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified in the direction of travel

Breakdown assistance
new fuses having the correct amperage. RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
! Only use fuses that have been approved of travel
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which The fuse allocation chart is located in the
have the correct fuse rating for the system vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
concerned. Otherwise, components or under the trunk floor (Y page 328).
systems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the Dashboard fuse box
components on the circuit and their functions Observe the important safety notes
stop operating. (Y page 339)
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by ! Do not use a pointed object such as a
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed screwdriver to open the cover in the
in the fuse allocation chart. dashboard. You could damage the
dashboard or the cover.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized fuse box when the cover is open.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
Before changing a fuse seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 339)
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 182).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.

Z
340 Fuses

X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
bottom in the direction of arrow =. from the fuse box.
X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of X To open: remove lines ; from the guides.
Breakdown assistance

arrow ; and remove it. X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind
connection = to do this.
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of
X Open clamp :.
the dashboard.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in the cover.
Fuse box in the engine compartment X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
Observe the important safety notes
X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
(Y page 339)
X Secure lines ; in the guides.
G WARNING
X Close the hood.
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Fuse box in the trunk
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood. Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 339)
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
the operation of the fuses.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
X Open the trunk lid.
turned off.
X Open the hood.
 Fuses 341

Coupe
X To open: turn rotary catch : of cover ;
clockwise.

Breakdown assistance
X Open cover ; downwards.

Cabriolet
X To open: raise trunk floor :(Y page 292).
X Using tabs =, push back floor covering
with slits ; and lift it up.

Z
342
 343

Useful information ............................ 344

Important safety notes .................... 344
Operation ........................................... 344
Winter operation ............................... 346
Tire pressure ..................................... 348
Loading the vehicle .......................... 355
All about wheels and tires ............... 359
Changing a wheel ............................. 367
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 372
Emergency spare wheel ................... 377

Wheels and tires

344 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and
i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics).
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your
Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
possible. Please note that your vehicle may used correctly can impair the operating
not be equipped with all features safety.
described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved
related systems and functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i Read the information on qualified workshop and ask about:
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Important safety notes
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires

(Y page 372).
the wheel brakes or suspension components
Information on air pressure for the tires on
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
your vehicle can be found:
accident.
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original Information placard on the B-pillar
part. (Y page 355)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct: flap (Y page 180)
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 348)
Rdesignation
Rmodel

When replacing tires, make sure to use the Operation

correct:
Rdesignation
Information on driving
Rmanufacturer If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
Rmodel
pressures and correct them if necessary.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
G WARNING noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you
steering and braking characteristics of the
suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
Tires without run-flat characteristics: as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your causing the unusual handling characteristics.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Operation 345

and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 348).
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or Observe the notes on the emergency spare
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over wheel (Y page 377).
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try The service life of tires depends, among other
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. things, on the following factors:
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the Rdrivingstyle
sidewalls, may be damaged.
Rtirepressure
Rdistance covered
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING Important safety notes on the tire
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation tread
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of G WARNING
accident. Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
and replace any damaged tires immediately. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk

Wheels and tires

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your speed is not adapted to suit the driving
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as conditions. There is a risk of accident.
well as after driving off-road or on rough If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of may exhibit different levels of wear at
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
damage such as: should regularly check the tread depth and
Rcuts in the tires the condition of the tread across the entire
Rpunctures
width of all tires.
Rtears
Minimum tire tread depth for:
in the tires
Rbulges RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the For safety reasons, replace the tires before
condition of the tread across the whole width the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
of the tire (Y page 345). If necessary, turn tire tread depth is reached.
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Z
346 Winter operation

Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
into the tire tread. a flat tire (Y page 329).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of factory. It is therefore recommended that
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been you additionally equip your vehicle with a
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
that it must be replaced. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Winter operation
type and make. General notes
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 329). section (Y page 367).
Wheels and tires

ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.
Driving with summer tires
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity significantly, and
RDo not drive with tires which have too little therefore traction and braking power as well.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces Change the tires on your vehicle to
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
RReplace the tires after six years at the
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
latest, regardless of wear.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
Observe the notes on the emergency spare for this type of damage.
wheel (Y page 377).

M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
characteristics), you can continue to drive ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of and do not provide sufficient traction. There
pressure in one or more tires. is a risk of an accident.
MOExtended tires may only be used in M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
Mercedes-Benz. winter tires or all-weather tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
 Winter operation 347

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
symbol in addition to the M+S marking to mount snow chains on steel wheels,
provide the best possible grip in wintry road make sure that you remove the respective
conditions. wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
Only these tires will allow driving safety otherwise be damaged.
systems such as ABS and ESP® to function For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
optimally in winter. These tires have been recommends that you only use snow chains
developed specifically for driving in snow. that have been specially approved for your
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
all wheels to maintain safe handling corresponding standard of quality.
characteristics. If you intend to mount snow chains, please
Always observe the maximum permissible bear the following points in mind:
speed specified for the M+S tires you have RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
mounted. wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
Once the winter tires are mounted: wheel-tire combinations (Y page 372).
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 351). ROnly use snow chains when driving on

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire roads completely covered by snow.
pressure loss warning system Remove the snow chains as soon as
possible when you come to a road that is

Wheels and tires

(Y page 352).
not snow-covered.
X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
monitor (Y page 352).
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
For more information on driving with the regulations if you wish to mount snow
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 377). chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
Snow chains
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
G WARNING pulling away with snow chains installed
If snow chains are installed to the front (Y page 75). This way you can allow the
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
body or chassis components. This could achieving an increased driving force
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. (cutting action).
There is a risk of an accident.
For more information on driving with the
To avoid hazardous situations: emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 377).
Rnever install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enough

space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".

Z
348 Tire pressure

Tire pressure Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes Tire and Loading Information placard

G WARNING
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
too high are associated with the following
hazards:
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
speeds.
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tire
traction.
: Recommended tire pressures
Rthe driving, steering and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired. The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
There is a risk of accident.
(Y page 355).
Wheels and tires

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard
and check the pressure of all the tires
contains the recommended tire pressures for
including the spare wheel:
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Rmonthly, at least are valid for the maximum permissible load
Rif the load changes and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
Rbefore beginning a long journey speed.
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving Tire pressure table
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire
pressure tables are examples. Tire
pressure specifications are vehicle-specific
and may deviate from the data shown here.
The tire pressure specifications that are
valid for your vehicle can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here. The tire pressure table contains the
Operation with the emergency spare recommended pressures for cold tires for
wheel (Y page 377). various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
 Tire pressure 349

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this

can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking.
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
seats may differ.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires

G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
(Y page 361). does not permit any reliable conclusion about
If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring
road speeds, the pressures should be reset system, the tire pressure can be checked
to the higher values: using the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase
and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire
i The tire pressures for increased loads
pressures when the tires are cold.
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.

Z
350 Tire pressure

The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without Roverheat, leading to tire defects
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Rhave an adverse effect on handling
hours and characteristics
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than Rwear quickly and unevenly
1 mile (1.6 km). Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed Overinflation
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure G WARNING
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
1.5 psi). Take this into account when because they are damaged more easily by
checking the pressure of warm tires. Only road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the also suffer from irregular wear, which can
current operating conditions. If you check the severely impair the braking properties and the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
resulting value will be higher than if the tires accident.
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires, including the spare wheel.
Wheels and tires

tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be

too low. Overinflated tires may:
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rincrease the braking distance
cold tires: Rhave an adverse effect on handling
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard characteristics
on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rinthe tire pressure table on the inside of Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
the fuel filler flap Rbe more susceptible to damage
Ron the yellow label on the emergency spare
wheel (depending on the vehicle Maximum tire pressures
equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving : Example: maximum permissible tire
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. pressure
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
tires, including the spare wheel. inflation pressure. Always observe the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
 Tire pressure 351

when adjusting the tire pressure Tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 348). (Canada only)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- General notes
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration. While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
Checking the tire pressures the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
Important safety notes of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
Observe the notes on tire pressure a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
(Y page 348). message will appear in the multifunction
display.
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found: You can recognize the tire pressure loss
warning by the Run Flat Indicator
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
Information placard on the B-pillar which appears in the Service menu of the
(Y page 355) multifunction display. Information on the
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler message display can be found in the

Wheels and tires

flap (Y page 180) "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
Rin the "Tire pressure" section system" section (Y page 352).
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 348)
Important safety notes
Checking tire pressures manually The tire pressure warning system does not
To determine and set the correct tire warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
pressure, proceed as follows: Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 348).
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked. The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
the valve.
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the tire pressure loss warning system.
the recommended value on the Tire and
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
Loading Information placard (Y page 348).
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
the recommended value. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. abrupt steering maneuvers.
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, The function of the tire pressure loss warning
check the tire pressure again using the tire system is limited or delayed if:
pressure gauge.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
tires.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Z
352 Tire pressure

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style If you wish to confirm the restart:
(cornering at high speeds or driving with X Press the a button.
high rates of acceleration).
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
appears in the multifunction display.
vehicle or on the roof). X Press the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
Restarting the tire pressure loss
X Press the a button.
warning system
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system message appears in the multifunction
if you have: display.
Rchanged the tire pressure After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires loss warning system will monitor the set
Rmounted new wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires.
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire If you wish to cancel the restart:
pressures are set properly on all four tires X Press the % button.
for the respective operating conditions.
or
The recommended tire pressure can be X When the Tire Pressure Now OK?
found on the Tire and Loading Information
Wheels and tires

message appears, press the 9

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
or : button to select Cancel.
Additionally, a tire pressure table is
attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire X Press the a button.

pressure loss warning system can only give The tire pressure values stored at the last
reliable warnings if you have set the correct restart will continue to be monitored.
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure
is set, these incorrect values will be
monitored. Tire pressure monitor
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
General notes
pressures (Y page 348).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor
X Press the = or ; button on the the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
steering wheel to select the Service
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
menu.
pressure monitor only functions if the correct
X Press the 9 or : button on the
sensors are installed on all wheels.
steering wheel to select the Tire
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
Pressure menu.
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
X Press the a button.
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
The Run Flat Indicator Active tire is shown in the Service menu of the
Press 'OK' to Restart message multifunction display.
appears in the multifunction display.
 Tire pressure 353

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
Example: current tire pressure display remain continuously illuminated. This
For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the
to the "Checking the tire pressure vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
electronically" section (Y page 354). exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
Important safety notes the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
G WARNING malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reasons, including the installation of
should be checked at least once a month incompatible replacement or alternate tires
when cold and inflated to the pressure or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS from functioning properly. Always
on the Tire and Loading Information placard

Wheels and tires

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading continue to function properly.
Information placard or the tire pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire pressure It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
for those tires. pressure to that recommended for cold tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 348). Note that the correct tire
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure for the current operating situation
pressure telltale when one or more of your must first be taught-in to the tire pressure
tires are significantly underinflated. monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure pressure, the warning threshold for the
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check warning message is aligned to the reference
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire cold tires (Y page 355). The current
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. pressures are saved as new reference values.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency As a result, a warning message will appear if
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's the tire pressure drops significantly.
handling and stopping ability. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the the notes on the recommended tire pressure
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire (Y page 348).
pressure, even if underinflation has not The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
reached the level to trigger illumination of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Z
354 Tire pressure

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Checking the tire pressure
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid electronically
abrupt steering maneuvers.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165).
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
X Press the = or ; button on the
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up steering wheel to select the Service
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or menu.
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the 9 or : button to select

Rif
Tire Pressure.
the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
X Press the a button.
tire pressure on one or more tires is
significantly too low. The tire pressure The current tire pressure of each tire is
monitor is not malfunctioning. shown in the multifunction display.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a If the vehicle has been parked for over
minute and then remains lit constantly, the 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. displayed after driving a few
minutes message appears.
i In addition to the warning lamp, a
message appears in the multifunction After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
display. monitor automatically detects new wheels or
Wheels and tires

new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of

Further information can be found on
the tire pressure value to the individual
(Y page 269).
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, Monitor Active display message is shown
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the pressures are already being monitored.
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
minute and then remaining lit. When the i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
malfunction has been rectified, the tire the system may continue to show the tire
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few pressure of the wheel that has been
minutes of driving. removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
note that the value displayed for the
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
position where the spare wheel is mounted
board computer may differ from those
is not the same as the current tire pressure
measured at a gas station with a pressure
of the emergency spare wheel.
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
board computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
Tire pressure monitor warning
values indicated by a pressure gauge are
messages
higher than those shown by the on-board If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire loss in one or more tires, a warning message
pressures. is shown in the multifunction display and the
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
be affected by interference from radio comes on.
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
headphones, two-way radios) that may be appears in the multifunction display, the
being operated in or near the vehicle. tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
 Loading the vehicle 355

and must be corrected at the next X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
opportunity. 2 in the ignition lock.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the = or ; button on the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in steering wheel to select the Service
one or more tires has dropped significantly menu.
and the tires must be checked. X Press the 9 or : button to select
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction Tire Pressure.
message appears in the multifunction X Press the a button.
display, the tire pressure in one or more The multifunction display shows the
tires has dropped suddenly and the tires current tire pressure for the individual tires
must be checked. or the Tire pressures will be
Observe the instructions and safety notes in displayed after driving a few
the display messages in the "Tires" section minutes message.
(Y page 269). X Press the : button.
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are The Use Current Pressures as New
rotated, the tire pressures may be Reference Values message appears in
displayed for the wrong positions for a the multifunction display.
short time. This is rectified after a few
If you wish to confirm the restart:
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures

Wheels and tires

are displayed for the correct positions. X Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure monitor message appears in the multifunction
display.
When you restart the tire pressure monitor,
After driving for a few minutes, the system
all existing warning messages are deleted and
checks whether the current tire pressures
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
are within the specified range. The new tire
the currently set tire pressures as the
pressures are then accepted as reference
reference values for monitoring. In most
values and monitored.
cases, the tire pressure monitor will
automatically detect the new reference If you wish to cancel the restart:
values after you have changed the tire X Press the % button.
pressure. However, you can also define The tire pressure values stored at the last
reference values manually as described here. restart will continue to be monitored.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value
Loading the vehicle
recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading Instruction labels for tires and loads
Information placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 348). G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
Additional tire pressure values for different
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
steering and driving characteristics and lead
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
(Y page 348).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
on all four wheels.

Z
356 Loading the vehicle

your vehicle. Never overload the tires by Maximum permissible gross vehicle
exceeding the maximum load. weight rating

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show

the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory. X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle Information placard: "The combined weight
identification plate informs you of the of occupants and cargo should never
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
Wheels and tires

occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You

load and luggage must not exceed the
can also find information about the
specified value.
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle. i The specifications shown on the Tire and
The maximum gross axle weight rating is Loading Information placard in the
the maximum weight that can be carried illustration are examples. The maximum
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never permissible gross vehicle weight rating is
exceed the maximum load or the vehicle-specific and may differ from that in
maximum gross axle weight rating for the the illustration. You can find the valid
front or rear axle. maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

B-pillar (example: Coupe)

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum number of seats : indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to
 Loading the vehicle 357

travel in the vehicle. This information can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor

Wheels and tires

Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.

Z
358 Loading the vehicle

Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 355).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2
Wheels and tires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
 All about wheels and tires 359

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
(maximum gross Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)

Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading
carefully, you should still make sure that the Standards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading
be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards

Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 355).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data.
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear
grade, ; traction grade and = temperature
grade. These regulations do not apply to
Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North
America are provided with the corresponding
quality grading markings on the sidewall of
the tire.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.

Z
360 All about wheels and tires

Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road
RTemperature grade: A
conditions when temperatures are around
All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 345). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified Further information on winter tires (M+S
U.S. government course. For example, a tire tires) (Y page 346).
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a Temperature
Wheels and tires

tire graded 100. G WARNING

The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is
upon the actual conditions of their use, established for a tire that is properly inflated
however, and may depart significantly from and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
the norm, due to variations in driving habits, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
service practices and differences in road separately or in combination, can cause
characteristics and climate conditions. excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Traction
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
G WARNING B, and C. These represent the tire's
The traction grade assigned to this tire is resistance to the generation of heat and its
based on straight-ahead braking traction ability to dissipate heat when tested under
tests, and does not include acceleration, controlled conditions on a specified indoor
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
characteristics. temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage excessive temperature can lead to sudden
to the drive train. tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the
specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor required by law.
traction performance.
 All about wheels and tires 361

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.

: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

Wheels and tires

? Rim diameter
(Y page 365) A Load bearing index
; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 364)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 363) General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 350)
may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 364) If there is no letter preceding the size
C Tire size designation, load-bearing description (as shown above): these are
capacity and speed index (Y page 361) passenger vehicle tires according to
D Load index (Y page 363) European manufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales
designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards.
deviate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing tire width in millimeters.
capacity and the approved maximum speed Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. between the tire height and tire width and is
There is a risk of accident. shown in percent. The aspect ratio is

Z
362 All about wheels and tires

calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire Index Speed rating
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
specified load limit. The maximum in the size description, depending on the
Wheels and tires

permissible load can be found on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The service specification is made up of
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side load-bearing index A and speed rating
(Y page 355). B.
Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service
load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
bear. For further information on the maximum order to find out the maximum speed.
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the
(Y page 363). maximum speed is limited according to the
For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification.
index, see "Load index" (Y page 363). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
approved maximum speed of the tire. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.
The maximum speed of the tire is limited to
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may 186 mph (300 km/h).
deviate from the data in the example. RThe size description for all tires with
Regardless of the speed rating, always maximum speeds of over 186 mph
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the
adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in
conditions. parentheses. Example:
Summer tires 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
Index Speed rating tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
speed.
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
 All about wheels and tires 363

All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load
also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify speed index B on the sidewall
the requirements of the Rubber of the tire (Y page 361).
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents a standard
regarding the tire traction on snow. They load (SL) tire

Wheels and tires

have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
on snow. tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your RLight Load: represents a light load tire
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph RC, D, E: represents a load range that
(210km/h). depends on the maximum load that the tire
The speed rating of tires mounted at the can carry at a certain pressure
factory may be higher than the maximum
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
speed that the electronic speed limiter
deviate from the data in the example.
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
Maximum load rating
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 372).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum

permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Z
364 All about wheels and tires

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as a code to describe
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
(Y page 355).
A provides information about the age of a
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent
specific and may deviate from the values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire
2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or
retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and
other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire
possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in
the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used
of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number
Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Bar
For further information about retreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure.
see (Y page 344). 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
 All about wheels and tires 365

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
1 bar. the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire
the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for
Transportation. which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The number of occupants for which the The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
vehicle is designed multiplied by of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
68 kilograms (150 lb). wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
A uniform standard to grade the quality of exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction as specified on the vehicle identification plate
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross

Wheels and tires

weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
Recommended tire pressure the vehicle including all accessories,
The recommended tire pressure applies to occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
the tires mounted at the factory. noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard weight rating is specified on the vehicle
contains the recommended tire pressures for identification plate on the B-pillar on the
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the driver's side.
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for The maximum weight is the sum of:
various operating conditions, i.e. differing Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
load and speed conditions. Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment Rthe weight of the factory installed optional

This is the combined weight of all standard equipment

and optional equipment available for the Kilopascal (kPa)
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
installed on the vehicle or not.
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
Rim pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire (kPa) to 1 bar.
is mounted. Load index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
rating. The actual load on an axle must never of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The capacity more precisely.
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Z
366 All about wheels and tires

Curb weight Tread

The weight of a vehicle with standard The part of the tire that comes into contact
equipment including the maximum capacity with the road.
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
conditioning system and optional equipment Bead
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
not include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum load rating coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for Sidewall
which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one Weight of optional extras
tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated These optional extras, such as high-
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
Wheels and tires

by two. or a high-performance battery, are not

included in the curb weight and the weight of
PSI (pounds per square inch) the accessories.
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Aspect ratio This is a unique identifier which can be used
Relationship between tire height and tire by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
width in percent. example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
Tire pressure
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
This is pressure inside the tire applying an type code and the manufacturing date.
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in Load bearing index
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal The load bearing index (also load index) is a
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only code that contains the maximum load bearing
be corrected when the tires are cold. capacity of a tire.
Cold tire pressure Traction
The tires are cold: Traction is the result of friction between the
Rif the vehicle has been parked without tires and the road surface.
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
Treadwear indicators
hours and
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
1 mile (1.6 km).
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
 Changing a wheel 367

Occupant distribution Always observe the instructions and safety

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
their designated seating positions. (Y page 368).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Total load limit differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
number of seats in the vehicle. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Changing a wheel can rotate the wheels according to the
Flat tire intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no
The "Breakdown assistance" section warranty book is available, the tires should be
(Y page 328) contains information and notes rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of not change the direction of wheel rotation.
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
(Y page 329).

Wheels and tires

is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
wheel is mounted as described under
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 368).
Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
G WARNING of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
severely impair the driving characteristics if maintained.
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
The wheel brakes or suspension components its correct direction of rotation.
may also be damaged. There is a risk of
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Storing wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions. Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
monitor, electronic components are
located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used Cleaning the wheels
near the valve. This could damage the
electronic components. G WARNING
Only have tires changed at a qualified The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
specialist workshop. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.

Z
368 Changing a wheel

Components damaged in this way may fail Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. rolling away
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.

Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the parking brake.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
(Y page 328).
ahead position.
The folding wheel chock is an additional
X Shift the transmission to position P.
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
X Switch off the engine. rolling away, for example when changing a
Wheels and tires

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove wheel.

the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
X Fold out lower plate ;.
driver's door.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having the openings in base plate =.
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 165).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle (Y page 328).
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.

Securing the vehicle on level ground (example:

Coupe)
X On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
 Changing a wheel 369

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
(example: Coupe) objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
X On light downhill gradients: place
bearing capacity due to the restricted
chocks or other suitable items in front of
height.
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
Raising the vehicle not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
G WARNING Rnever place your hands and feet under the

Wheels and tires

If you do not position the jack correctly at the raised vehicle.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
There is a risk of injury. raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the when the vehicle is raised.
jack must be positioned vertically, directly Rmake sure that no persons are present in
under the jacking point of the vehicle. the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel the wheel you wish to change by about one
is being changed. It is not suited for full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
performing maintenance work under the completely.
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.

Z
370 Changing a wheel

Jacking points (example: Coupe) Example

The jacking points are located just behind the X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
front wheel housings and just in front of the beneath the jacking point.
rear wheel housings (arrows). X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect completely on jacking point = and the
the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers next
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
to the jacking points on the outer sills.
X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Wheels and tires

Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold

cover ; upwards.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt

completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.
X Remove the wheel.
 Changing a wheel 371

Mounting a new wheel X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
G WARNING X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged alignment bolt and push it on.
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
finger-tight.
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
accident.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified tight.
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads Lowering the vehicle
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
over. There is a risk of injury. Have the tightening torque immediately
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.

Wheels and tires

when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 367).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub Tightening the wheel nuts (example: vehicle with
an emergency spare wheel)
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-
clockwise until the vehicle is once again
standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The specified
tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with an
emergency spare wheel)

Z
372 Wheel and tire combinations

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the Information on tires, wheels and approved
cover into the outer sill. combinations can be obtained from any
X Check the tire pressure of the newly qualified specialist workshop.
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Overview of abbreviations used in the
Observe the recommended tire pressure following tire tables:
(Y page 348). RBA: both axles
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all RFA: front axle
wheels mounted must be equipped with RRA: rear axle
functioning sensors. The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheel and tire combinations
with the recommended tire pressures on
General notes the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and the fuel filler flap
wheels which have been approved by Observe the notes on recommended tire
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your pressures under various operating conditions
vehicle. (Y page 348).
Wheels and tires

These tires have been specially adapted for Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
use with the control systems, such as ABS the tires are cold. Comply with the
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
equip the vehicle with:
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
right)
certain AMG tires)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
may only be used on wheels that have been
tires)
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
is therefore recommended that you
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
affected. In addition, when driving with a
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
load, tire dimension variations could cause
workshop.
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. available at the factory for all countries.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for i On the following pages, you can find
damage resulting from the use of tires, information on approved wheel rims and
wheels or accessories other than those tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
tested and approved. winter tires. Winter tires are not available
 Wheel and tire combinations 373

at the factory as standard equipment or

optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in
certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires

Z
374 Wheel and tire combinations

Tires
E 350
Summer tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 W MOExtended BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
Wheels and tires

All-weather tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+S BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
 Wheel and tire combinations 375

Winter tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

E 350 4MATIC
Summer tires
R17

Wheels and tires

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 235/45 R17 94 W MOExtended BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+S BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Z
376 Wheel and tire combinations

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/45 R17 94 H M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

E 550
Summer tires
R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 91 Y FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
 Emergency spare wheel 377

All-weather tires
R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 91 H M+S FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/35 R18 94 H XL M+S2 Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tires
R18

Tires Alloy wheels

Wheels and tires

BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

Emergency spare wheel nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
Important safety notes as well as the tire type must be correct.
G WARNING
When using an emergency spare wheel or
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type spare wheel of a different size, you must not
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. (80 km/h).
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
Snow chains must not be mounted on
severely impair the driving characteristics.
emergency spare wheels.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt your driving style accordingly and General notes
drive carefully.
You should regularly check the pressure of
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
emergency spare wheel that differs in size. to long trips, and correct the pressure as
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare necessary (Y page 348). The applicable value
wheel of a different size briefly. is found on the wheel or under "Technical
Rdo not switch ESP® off. data" (Y page 379).
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare An emergency spare wheel may also be
wheel of a different size replaced at the mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Z
378 Emergency spare wheel

the speed limitation specified on the Always observe the instructions and safety
emergency spare wheel. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
Replace the tires after six years at the latest, (Y page 368).
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning
system/the tire pressure monitor when the
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
the system may still display the tire
pressure of the removed wheel for a few
minutes. The value displayed for the
mounted emergency spare wheel is not the
Wheels and tires

same as the current tire pressure of the

emergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

; Stowage well
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can
be found in the stowage well under the trunk
floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel :.
 Emergency spare wheel 379

Technical data
E 350
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 135/80 R17 103 M 3.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.77 in (19.5 mm)

E 350 4MATIC
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 135/80 R17 103 M 3.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.77 in (19.5 mm)

E 550

Wheels and tires

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

Z
380
 381

Useful information ............................ 382

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 382
Warranty ............................................ 382
Identification plates ......................... 382
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 384
Vehicle data ...................................... 390

Technical data
382 Identification plates

Useful information Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

replace and repair all factory-installed parts
i This Operator's Manual describes all in accordance with the following warranty
models and all standard and optional terms and conditions:
equipment of your vehicle available at the RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
time of publication of the Operator's REmission Systems Warranty
Manual. Country-specific differences are REmission Performance Warranty
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety- Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
related systems and functions. Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
i Read the information on qualified RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Information regarding technical data
Accessories warranties. These are available
General information at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The data stated here specifically refers to i If you lose the Service and Warranty
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult Information booklet, contact an authorized
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
the data for all vehicle variants and trim replacement. It will be mailed to you.
levels.
Technical data

Identification plates
Information in the printed Operator's
Vehicle identification plate with
Manual
vehicle identification number (VIN)
In the printed Operator's Manual you can find
information about:
RVehicle data
RTrunk lid opening dimensions
RTank capacity
RCoolant (engine)
REngine oil approval and capacity
RRefrigerant filling capacity and PAG oil
RTowing a trailer

X Open the left door.

Warranty You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
 Identification plates 383

VIN

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

; VIN
= Paint code
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
X Slightly raise front floor covering = and
fold floor covering flap : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 383)
Ron the vehicle identification plate

Technical data
(Y page 382)
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
; VIN
Engine number
= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle

identification plate is used only as an
example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.

: Emission control information plate,

including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
384 Service products and filling capacities

Service products and filling MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
capacities approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Important safety notes

Fuel
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and Important safety notes
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
G WARNING
and disposal of service products on the labels Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
of the respective original containers. Always incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
store service products sealed in their original explosion.
containers. Always keep service products out You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
of the reach of children. sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
H Environmental note refueling.
Dispose of service products in an
environmentally responsible manner. G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Service products include the following: There is a risk of injury.
RFuels You must make sure that fuel does not come
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
RCoolant
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
Technical data

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

RBrake fluid
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
RWindshield washer fluid observe the following:
RClimate control system refrigerant RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Comply with all valid regulations with respect using soap and water.
to handling, storing, and disposing of service RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
fluids.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
Components and service products must be clean water. Seek medical assistance
matched. You should therefore only use without delay.
products that have been tested and approved RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
by Mercedes-Benz.
assistance without delay. Do not induce
Information on tested and approved products vomiting.
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- RImmediately change out of clothing which
Benz Center or on the Internet at
has come into contact with fuel.
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following Tank capacity
inscription on the containers:
Model Total
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) capacity
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
All models 17.4 US gal
Other designations or recommendations (66.0 l)
indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
 Service products and filling capacities 385

Model Of which ! To ensure the longevity and full

reserve performance of the engine, only premium-
grade unleaded gasoline must be used.
All models Approx. If standard premium-grade unleaded
2.1 US gal gasoline is unavailable and unleaded
(8.0 l) gasoline of a lower grade is used for
refueling, observe the following
Gasoline precautions:
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
Fuel grade
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the as soon as possible.
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the speeds above 3000 rpm.
fuel system and the engine. Notify a Rnever refuel using fuel with an octane
qualified specialist workshop and have the number lower than 87. Otherwise,
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. engine failure could occur.
! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
a minimum octane rating of 91. permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded
gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be
! Only use the fuel recommended. used.

Technical data
Operating the vehicle with other fuels can You will usually find information about the fuel
lead to engine failure. grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
! Do not use the following: label on the pump, ask the staff for
RE85
assistance.
(gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol) i For further information, consult a
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) qualified specialist workshop or on the
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
Information on refueling (Y page 180).
RGasoline with metalliferous additives Additives
RDiesel ! Operating the engine with fuel additives
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel added later can lead to engine failure. Do
recommended for your vehicle. Do not use not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
additives. This can otherwise lead to engine not include additives for the removal and
damage. This does not include cleaning prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
additives for the removal and prevention of must only be mixed with additives
residue build-up. gasoline may only be recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply
mixed with cleaning additives with the instructions for use on the product
recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see label. More information about
"Additives". You can obtain further recommended additives can be obtained
information from any authorized Mercedes- from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Benz Center. Center.

Z
386 Service products and filling capacities

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the
fuel brands that have the additives. following fuel types:
The quality of the fuel available in some Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline
countries may not be sufficient. Residue RE85 fuel
could build up as a result. In such cases, and Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-
unleaded gasoline
Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with
the cleaning additive recommended by i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512). by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
You must observe the notes and mixing ratios inside of the fuel filler flap.
specified on the container.
Fuel consumption
Flexible Fuel vehicles The energy content of E85 fuel is less than
that of the same amount of premium-grade
Important safety notes gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when
G WARNING operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is
therefore higher than with premium-grade
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
gasoline.
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion. Maintenance
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Center that you are operating or have
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before operated the vehicle with E85 fuel.
refueling.
Technical data

Low outside temperatures

G WARNING If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. (0 †), the starting procedure can take
There is a risk of injury. noticeably longer when operating with E85
fuel.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
Engine oil
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately General notes
using soap and water. ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
specification other than is necessary to
immediately rinse them thoroughly with fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
clean water. Seek medical assistance not change the engine oil or oil filter in
without delay. order to achieve longer replacement
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical intervals than those prescribed. You could
assistance without delay. Do not induce otherwise cause engine damage or damage
vomiting. to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
RImmediately change out of clothing which Follow the instructions in the service
has come into contact with fuel. interval display regarding the oil change.
 Service products and filling capacities 387

Otherwise, you may damage the engine and Engine oil viscosity
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling engine oil
(Y page 384).
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
Center. Or visit the website of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
Model Engine MB temperatures. The table shows you which
model Approval SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
E 350 276 229.5 temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
E 350 4MATIC of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore

Technical data
E 550 278 229.5 strongly recommended that you carry out
regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil
containers.
Brake fluid
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
G WARNING
including the oil filter. The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
Model Capacity the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
E 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
brake system when the brakes are applied
E 350 4MATIC hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
E 550 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
Additives the specified intervals.

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. Comply with the important safety notes for
This could damage the engine. service products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 384).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.

Z
388 Service products and filling capacities

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Comply with the important safety precautions
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. for service products when handling coolant
Information about approved brake fluid can (Y page 384).
be obtained at any qualified specialist The coolant is a mixture of water and
workshop or on the Internet at antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. the following tasks:
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at Rcorrosion protection
a qualified specialist workshop and the Rantifreeze protection
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Rraising the boiling point
Booklet. If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
coolant during operation is approximately
Coolant 266 ‡ (130 †).
Important safety notes The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
G WARNING should:
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
components in the engine compartment, it
cooling system against freezing down to
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Let the engine cool down before you add Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
will not be dissipated as effectively.
Technical data

clean the antifreeze from components before

starting the engine. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
! Only add coolant that has been premixed inhibitor.
with the desired antifreeze protection. You Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
could otherwise damage the engine. corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
Further information on coolants can be accordance with
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
for Service Products, MB Specifications for i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
Internet at adequate antifreeze and corrosion
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or protection.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
i The coolant is checked with every
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, maintenance interval at a qualified
even in countries where high temperatures specialist workshop.
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
 Service products and filling capacities 389

Filling capacities At temperatures below freezing:

Missing values were not available at time of X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
going to print. of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
Model Capacity Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
E 350 Approx. 10.1 US gal temperature.
E 350 4MATIC (9.6 l) RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 2 parts water.
E 550 Approx. 11.5 US qt RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
(10.9 l)
WinterFit to 1 part water.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze. WinterFit to 1 part water.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
Windshield washer system and fluid all year round.
headlamp cleaning system
Important safety notes Climate control system refrigerant
G WARNING Important safety notes
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot The climate control system of your vehicle is

Technical data
engine components or the exhaust system it filled with refrigerant R-134a.
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
Make sure that no windshield washer type used can be found on the radiator cross
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. member.
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the used. The approved PAG oil may not be
level sensor may be damaged. mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit approved for R-134a refrigerant.
washer fluid should be mixed together. The Otherwise, the climate control system may
spray nozzles may otherwise become be damaged.
blocked. Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
Comply with the important safety notes for or replacing components, may only be carried
service products when handling washer fluid out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
(Y page 384). applicable regulations must be adhered to,
At temperatures above freezing: SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture system carried out at a qualified specialist
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. workshop.
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

Z
390 Vehicle data

Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Example: refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
: Warning symbol payload.
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable SAE standards
? PAG oil part number
Dimensions and weights
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a
Technical data

qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.

All models Capacity Model : Opening height

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz E 350, Coupe 66.1 in

(590 ± 10 g) E 350 4MATIC, (1680 mm)
Coupe
PAG oil E 550, Coupe
E 350, Cabriolet 60.6 in
E 550, Cabriolet (1538 mm)
 Vehicle data 391

Missing values were not available at time of E 550

going to print.
Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1398 mm)
All models Cabriolet
Vehicle width 79.4 in (2016 mm) Turning radius 36.7 ft (11.19 m)
including exterior
mirrors
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)
Vehicle height 80.5 in (2045 mm)
when opening/
closing the roof,
Cabriolet only
Maximum roof 220 lb (100 kg)
load, Coupe only
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load

E 350
Vehicle length 185.2 in (4703 mm)

Technical data
Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1397 mm)
Coupe
Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1398 mm)
Cabriolet
Turning radius 36.6 ft (11.15 m)

E 350 4MATIC
Vehicle length 185.2 in (4703 mm)
Vehicle height 55.0 in (1397 mm)
Turning radius 36.6 ft (11.15 m)

E 550
Vehicle length 186.9 in (4746 mm)
Vehicle height, 55.0 in (1397 mm)
Coupe

Z
392